232
December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Duke Power Company Oconee Nuclear Station Emergency Power and Engineered Safeguards Functional Test 1.0 Purpose 1.1 To demonstrate the ability of the Oconee emergency power system to accept loads in six different simulated LOCA/LOOP or LOOP scenarios. 1.2 To accumulate data for post test engineering analysis of the emergency power system performance. 1.3 To demonstrate the abilit of the Engineered Safeguards, equipment to operate in foui different LOCA/LOOP scenarios. 1.4 To record important ECCS hydraulic parameters during simulated large break LOCA with LOOP. 2.0 References 2.1 Technical Specification 3.7 2.2 OP/0/A/1 106/19 Keowee Hydro at Oconee 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power 2.4 OP/0/A/1107/03 100kV Power Supply 2.5 OP/0/A/1 600/05 SSF Normal Power 2.6 AP/1,2,3/A/1700/11 Loss of Power 2.7 AP/1,2,3/A/1 700/26 Loss of Decay Heat Removal 2.8 NRC Generic Letter 88-17 Loss of Decay Heat Removal 2.9 IIR-88-25-03 Loss of Decay Heat Removal 2.10 TT/0/A/0610/25A Data Acquisition for Emergency Power and Engineered Safeguards Functional Test 3.0 Time Required 3.1 4 days 3.2 Test complexity and potential for loss of decay heat removal from power failure implies the Unit Shift Supervisor and at least two Reactor Operators in each Control Room should have no other duties during test. Additionally, personnel responsibilities are as follows: 9612120252 961210 PDR ADOCK 05000269 F PDR

2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    0

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

3rd DRAFT Duke Power Company

Oconee Nuclear Station

Emergency Power and Engineered Safeguards Functional Test

1.0 Purpose

1.1 To demonstrate the ability of the Oconee emergency power system to accept loads in six different simulated LOCA/LOOP or LOOP scenarios.

1.2 To accumulate data for post test engineering analysis of the emergency power system performance.

1.3 To demonstrate the abilit of the Engineered Safeguards, equipment to operate in foui different LOCA/LOOP scenarios.

1.4 To record important ECCS hydraulic parameters during simulated large break LOCA with LOOP.

2.0 References

2.1 Technical Specification 3.7

2.2 OP/0/A/1 106/19 Keowee Hydro at Oconee

2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power

2.4 OP/0/A/1107/03 100kV Power Supply

2.5 OP/0/A/1 600/05 SSF Normal Power

2.6 AP/1,2,3/A/1700/11 Loss of Power

2.7 AP/1,2,3/A/1 700/26 Loss of Decay Heat Removal

2.8 NRC Generic Letter 88-17 Loss of Decay Heat Removal

2.9 IIR-88-25-03 Loss of Decay Heat Removal

2.10 TT/0/A/0610/25A Data Acquisition for Emergency Power and Engineered Safeguards Functional Test

3.0 Time Required

3.1 4 days

3.2 Test complexity and potential for loss of decay heat removal from power failure implies the Unit Shift Supervisor and at least two Reactor Operators in each Control Room should have no other duties during test. Additionally, personnel responsibilities are as follows:

9612120252 961210 PDR ADOCK 05000269 F PDR

Page 2: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 2 of 202

*Four Test Technicians - take data and other duties required by procedure.

* One Designated Electrical Systems Engineering Test Representative - available to resolve any electrical technical questions during test and provide support as required to Operations Shift Manager, Management Designee, and overall Test Coordinator.

* One Designated Mechanical Systems Test Representative available to resolve mechanical (hydraulic) technical questions during test and provide support as required to the Operations Shift manager, Management Designee, and Test Coordinator.

* One Management Designee - Designated by the Operations Superintendent to monitor test and provide support to the Operations Shift Manager during critical portions of test. This designee has the authority to abort test and, if necessary, provide recommendations to the Operations Shift Manager on actions to place the plant in a stable condition. This designee will give or oversee a pre-job briefing with the affected personnel.

* Test Coordinator - available to oversee and coordinate all necessary Test pre-requisites, evaluate problems during the test, and provide a Single Point of Contact for all Test related issues.

* One Keowee Operator and Keowee Technical Support monitor Keowee Units while operating during this test.

* One Senior Reactor Operator and two licensed Reactor Operators in each Control Room - monitor and execute actions required by the test for their respective Control Rooms.

* One Data Collection Manager to oversee and coordinate all pretest, test and post test data collection activities.

4.0 Prerequisites Test

4.1 PT/3/A/0610/01A (EPSL Normal Source Voltage Sensing Circuit) 4.2 PT/3/A/0610/01B (EPSL Startup Source Voltage Sensing Circuit)

4.3 PT/3/A/0610/01C (EPSL Standby Bus Voltage Sensing Circuit)

4.4 PT/3/A/0610/01J (Emergency Power Switching Logic Test)

4.5 PT/3/A/0251/24 (HPI Full Flow Check Valve Test)

4.6 TT/3/A/01 50/44 (LPI Full Flow Test)

__ 4.7 PT/3/A/0202/12 (Component Test of ES Channels 1 & 2)

Page 3: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 3 of 202

4.8 PT/3/A/0202/08 (Component Test of ES Channels 3 & 4)

4.9 PT/3/A/01 60/03 (Component Test of ES Channels 5 & 6)

4.10 PT/3/A/0204/09 (Component Test of ES Channels 7 & 8)

_- 4.11 PT/0/A/0610/17 (Operability Test of 4160 Volt Breakers) (Units 1, 2, 3)

5.0 Test Equipment Required

5.1 Reference TT/0/A/0610/25A

6.0 Limits and Precautions

6.1 Following Load Shed or Dead Bus Transfers at least 1 Condenser Cooling Water (CCW) pump on Unit 1 AND Unit 2 must be started within 1.5 hours to prevent a loss of siphon fIw.

6.2 Breathing air will be lost on all three Oconee Units once initial load shed is made. All work requiring breathing air shall be rescheduled until after test.

6.3 The Power supply to the A Chiller will be interrupted during all six test. The power supply to B Chiller will be interrupted during test 12.1, 12.2, 12.5 & 12.6.

6.4 The Worthington Air Compressors will lose power during four of the six tests. The Primary Instrument Air Compressor will remain running for the duration of the test.

6.5 Power to the Gaseous Waste Disposal (GWD) compressors will be interrupted during portions of the test which may result in a positive pressure in the GWD vent header for short periods.

6.6 This test will result in power interruption, breaker cycling, and equipment starts on all 3 Oconee Units. All maintenance and testing activities NOT associated with this test in the plant, switchyards, Keowee & SSF shall be suspended except as allowed by the Test Coordinator.

6.7 All Unit 1 & 2 LPSW pumps anLPI pumps must be available during the test to provide defense-n-depth for decay heat removal.

6.8 Observe motor starting duties during this test.

Page 4: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 4 of 202

Pump/Fan Allowed Successive Time required for motor to Attempts to start with return to rated temperature

motor at: with: Ambient Rated Motor Motor idle after Tempera- Tempera- Running attempted

ture ture starts: (OF) (OF) (Minutes) (Minutes)

RBS Pump 2 1 5 15 LPSW Pump 2 1 5 15

LPI Pump 2 1 5 15 Unit 1 MD EFDW 3 2 5 15

Pump

Unit 2&3 MD EFDW 3 1 20 60 Pump

CC Pump 3 2 10 30 HPSW Jockey Pump 3 2 15 30

SF Cooling Pump 3 2 15 15 RBCU Fan 2 1 30 30

2 1 5 15

7.0 Required Station Status

7.1 Units 1 and 2 at Cold S/D.

7.2 Unit 3 Defueled.

7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns).

8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions

NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any order.

8.1 Verify test has Plant Operational Review Committee approval.

8.2 List names of personnel assigned which are required to be available until completion of test:

Test Coordinator

Electrical Systems Test Representative

Mechanical Systems Test Representative

Management Designee

Page 5: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 5 of 202

Data Collection manager

8.3 Provide a copy of this procedure to Keowee Hydro personnel.

8.4 Verify Temporary Modification installed to supply alternate (retail) power to Steam Package Boiler fuel oil pump.

8.5 Perform Enclosure 13.4 (Pre-Test 4160 Switchgear Checklist and 600V Load Center Checklist).

8.6 Verify that Radiation Protection, Outage Management, and Bartlett are aware that the manner in which the Unit 3 Fuel Transfer Canal will be filled for this test may result in higher than normal contamination levels in the canal and incore tank.

8.7 Notify the following of the approximate start time of this test and the potential impact to their group:

* Keowee Personnel

* Systems Operating Center

* Security (SSF powered by batteries while OTS1-1 denergized).

* Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor (EDC system and count room will be affected by power interruption).

* Unit 1, 2 & 3 Outage Managers

* Shift Work Manager

* Chemistry

----- 8.8 Align Unit 1 Systems for load-shed and simulated hot S/D loads by performing Enclosure 13.1 (Unit 1 Pre-test Alignment).

* List on Unit 1 RO & CR SRO turnover sheet that TT/0/A/0610/025 is in progress.

8.9Align Unit 2 Systems for load-shed and simulated hot S/D loads by performing Enclosure 13.2 (Unit 2 Pre-test Alignment).

* List on Unit 2 RO & CR SRO turnover sheet that TT/0/A/0610/025 is in progress.

-- 8.10 Align Unit 3 Systems for simulated Engineered Safeguards and load shed loading by performing Enclosure 13.3 (Unit 3

Page 6: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 6 of 202

Pre-Test Alignment).

* List on Unit 3 RO & CR SRO turnover sheet that TT/0/A/0610/025 is in progress.

8.11 Perform Enclosure 13.4 (Pre-Test 4160 Switchgear Checklist and 600V Load Center Checklist).

8.12 To prevent Second Siphon Flow initiation, perform the following:

..8.12.1 Record 2CCW-7 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) "AS FOUND" switch position:-

__/ 8.12.2 Place 2CCW-7 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) switch in the PULL TO LOCK position.

--- 8.12.2.1 White Tag 2CCW-7 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) switch.

8.12.3 Verify by computer indication that the following valves are CLOSED.

S1 CCW-1 (CCW 1A1 Emergency Discharge - D0299)

* 1 CCW-2 (CCW 1A2 Emergency Discharge - D0301)

* 1CCW-3 (CCW 1 BI Emergency Discharge - D0303)

* 1 CCW-4 (CCW 1 B2 Emergency Discharge - D0305)

S1 CCW-5 (CCW 1 C1 Emergency Discharge - D0307)

* 1 CCW-6 (CCW 1 C2 Emergency Discharge - D0309)

8.12.4 Record 1CCW 1-6 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) "AS FOUND" switch position:

-- 8.12.5 Place 1CCW 1-6 (Water Box Emer Disch) switch in PULL TO LOCK position:

8.12.6 White Tag 1 CCW 1-6 (Water Box Emer Disch) switch in PULL TO LOCK position.

8.12.7 Record 3CCW-93 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) "AS FOUND" switch position ---

-_/ 8.12.8 Place 3CCW-93 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) switch to "PULL TO LOCK".

-_8.12.8.1 White Tag 3CCW-93 (Water Box Emergency Discharge) switch.

Page 7: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 7 of 202

8.13 OPEN OR verify OPEN the CCW Crossover valves on all 3 Oconee Units by performing the following:

/ * 1 CCW-40 (Unit 1 Crossover Tie) (TB-1-J/K-22)

/* 2 CCW-41 (Unit 2 Crossover Tie) (TB-1-J-40)

* 3 CCW-42 (Unit 3 Crossover Tie) (TB-1 -K-44, 1 Oft. UP)

8.14 To allow closing OTS1-1 while an ES signal is present on Units 2 or 3, perform the following:

/ _8.14.1 Verify SSF Breaker OTS1-1 CLOSED

8.14.2 Position Breaker #4 in DC panel board 1 DIA to "OFF" and place Blue Tag.

/____a. Breaker 1DIA #4 "OFF"

b. Blue Tag placed

8.14.3 Position Breaker # 4 in DC panel board 2DIA to "OFF" and place Blue Tag.

/ a. Breaker 2DIA #4 "OFF"

b. Blue Tag placed

8.14.4 Position Breaker # 9 in DC panel board 3DIA to "OFF" and place Blue Tag.

/-__a.Breaker 3DIA #9 "OFF"

b. Blue Tag placed

8.15 Install Switchable Jumpers in the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pump breaker compartments:

8.15.1 Stop the 3A SF COOLING PUMP.

8.15.2 Red tag open 3A SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XL-2C).

8.15.3 Install switchable jumper (labeled SFCP-3A) in MCC 3XL, compartment 2C, between terminals 12 and 13. (O-2752-A29, OEE-25-3).

8.15.3.1 Place Blue Tag on jumper labeled SFCP-3A.

8.15.3.2Verify the switch on the jumper is in the OFF position.

Page 8: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 8 of 202

8.15.4 Remove red tag and close 3A SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XL-2C).

8.15.5 Start the 3A SF COOLING PUMP.

8.15.6 Stop the 3B SF COOLING PUMP.

8.15.7 Red tag open 3B SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XN-3C).

8.15.8 Install switchable jumper (labeled SFCP-3B) in MCC 3XN, compartment 3C, between terminals 12 and 13. (O-2752-A36, OEE-25-3).

8.15.8.1 Place Blue Tag on jumper labeled SFCP-3B.

--- 8.15.8.2 Verify the switch on the jumper is in the OFF position.

8.15.9 Remove red tag and close 3B SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XN-3C).

8.15.10 Start the 3S SF COOLING PUMP.

8.16 Verify that NO Fuel Handling activities are to be performed during the performance of this test.

NOTE: The SL1 AND SL2 breakers will be OPEN for the test prerequisites.

-- _8.17 Complete the enclosure Charging Standby Bus 1 AND 2 from Lee Steam Station for Backup ower of OP/0/A1 107/03 (1 00KV Power Supply) to the point that the 100 KV TRANSMISSION LINE 1S ENERGIZED TO CT-5.

.. 8.18 Verify R.B. Equipment Hatches are closed with a minimum of 6 bolts installed on all three Oconee Units.

8.19 Very Both Keowee Units are operable with Unit 2 aligned to CT-4.

8.20 Verify and maintain Unit 3 BWST Temperature >55"F.

8.21 Install Electrical and Mechanical Systems Monitoring Equipment per TT/O/A/0610/025A

8.22 Verify the Primary Instrument Air Compressor is in service.

8.23 Notify Radwaste that no liquid waste releases can be performed while testing is being performed.

Page 9: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 .3rd DRAFT Page 9 of 202

8.24 Verify the following batteries and associated chargers are operable:

* 1, 2, 3, CA ad CB

* 1, ? 3 PA and PB

dY1 and SY2

* DCSF or DCSFS

Page 10: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 10 of 202

9.0 TEST METHOD 9.1 Initial Lineup:

Operations will align Unit 1 and 2 Primary and Secondary Systems per attached Enclosures to allow the running of nonload shed loads to Simulate Hot Shutdown loads. This includes running Emergency Feedwater (EFW) and High Pressure Injection (HPI) pumps in recirc. Unit 3 will also run simulated hot shutdown loads during tests described in sections 9.2 and 9.4

Operations will align Unit 3 primary and secondary systems to simulate an Engineered Safeguards (ES) channels 1 through 8 actuation during tests described in sections 9.6, 9.8, 9.10, and 9.12. This includes aligning the HPI and Low Pressure Injection (LPI) Systems so that full Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS) injection will occur when ES is actuated and the Main Feeder Busses (MFB's) energized. Other ES components [Reactor Building Cooling Units (RBCU's), Penetration Room Ventilation (PRV) tans, Low Pressure Service Water (LPSW) pumps, Reactor Building Spray pumps] will also be aligned to run in the ES mode. Electric containment isolation valves will be initially aligned so that they must travel to their Safety Position when ES is actuated and the MFB's are re-energized. The Unit 3 secondary s stem will be aligned to allow the running of both Motor Driven Emergency Feedwater (MDEFW) pumps in recirc.

9.2 Block Loading Three Unit Loss Of Offsite Power (LOOP) Loads onto the Keowee Underground:

All three Oconee Units will be aligned to their respective startup transformers. Loads will be started on all three units (HPI pumps, MDEFW pumps, etc.) to simulate hot shutdown loads. Simultaneously, all three Unit's startup transformers will be deenergized and Keowee Emergency started from shutdown condition. After s 21 seconds all three Oconee Units will Load Shed. At a 31 seconds all Three Oconee Units will Block Load onto the Keowee Underground Unit. An Enclosure is provided with contingency actions in the event the transfer to the Keowee Underground fails.

9.3 Dead Bus Transfer to Startup Source (System Grid):

After loading onto the Keowee Underground, Dead Bus Transfers (one Oconee Unit at a time) will be performed to transfer back to the startup transformer. Enclosures are provided to recover essential loads after each Dead Bus transfer.

9.4 Block Loading Three Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Overhead after Keowee Load Rejection and Switchyard (S.Y.) Isolation:

All Three Oconee Units will be aligned to their respective

Page 11: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 11 of 202

startup transformers. Simulated hot shutdown loads will be started on each Oconee Unit. The Keowee Overhead unit will be started and placed on the System Grid at the Maximum permissible load. A S.Y. Isolation will be initiated which will result in a loss of power to each Oconee Unit; emergency start of both Keowee Unit's; and a load rejection of the Keowee Overhead Unit. All three Oconee Units will receive power from the Keowee Overhead unit through their respective startup transformer in a 20 seconds. An Enclosure is provided with contingency actions in the event the Keowee Overhead unit fails.

9.5 Synchronization of the Keowee Overhead Unit to the System Grid:

While sup plying all three Oconee Unit loads, the Keowee Overhead Unit will be synchronized back to the System Grid across PCB-8. This will connect all three Oconee Units to the System Grid. The S.Y. configuration will be restored to normal.

9.6 Block Loading One Unit LOCA and One Unit LOOP loads (large unscheduled load) onto the Keowee Underground simultaneously while accelerating (a 60% voltage and frequency):

All three Oconee Units will be aligned to their respective startup transformers. Unit 1 will have an ES channel placed in test to initiate LOCA-timing in Emergency Power Switching Logic (EPSL). Simultaneously, Unit 1 and Unit 3 will have their startup transformers de-energized and ES channels 1 through 8 will be actuated on Unit 3. Unit 1 with simulated hot shutdown loads and Unit 3 with simulated ES loads, will Block Load onto the Keowee Underground Unit in a 11 seconds. An enclosure is provided to terminate ECCS flow. An Enclosure is also provided with contingency actions in the event the transfer to the Keowee Underground fails.

9.7 Dead Bus Transfer to Startup Source (System Grid):

Dead Bus Transfers (one Oconee Unit at a time) will be performed to transfer back to the startup transformers. nclosures are be provided to recover essential loads after each

dead bus transfer.

9.8 Block Loading one unit LOCA and one unit LOOP loads (large unscheduled load) onto the Keowee Underground simultaneously after Load Rejection (s20 seconds):

The same test sequence described in step 9.6 will be performed with the exception that the Keowee Underground unit will be placed on the System Grid at Maximum permissible load prior to de-energizing Unit 1 and Unit 3 startup transformers and actuating ES channels 1 through 8 on Unit 3.

Page 12: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 12 of 202

9.9 Dead Bus Transfer to Startup Source (System Grid):

After loading onto the Keowee Underground dead bus transfers (one Oconee Unit at a time) will be performed to transfer back to the startup transformers. Enclosures are provided to recover essential loads after each Dead Bus Transfer.

9.10 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA followed by Two Unit LOOP loads to the Keowee Underground after Keowee Load Rejection:

All three Oconee Units will be aligned to their respective startup transformers. The Keowee Underground Unit will be started and placed on the System Grid at Maximum permissible load. Simultaneously all three startup transformers will be deenergized and ES channels 1 through 8 will be actuated on Unit 3. Unit 3 will load onto the Keowee Underground (after load rejection) in a 20 seconds with simulated ES loads (including MDEFW pumps). Units 1 and 2 will block load on the Keowee Underground in a 31 seconds with simulated Hot S/D loads. Enclosures are provided for each Oconee Unit to restart essential loads (S.F. Cooling S.Y. Battery Feeders, CCW, etc.) and terminate ECCS flow (Unit 3) at the appropriate time. An Enclosure is also be provided with contingency actions in case the transfer to the Keowee Underground falls.

9.11 Dead Bus Transfer to the Startup Source (System Grid):

After loading onto the Keowee Underground, Dead Bus Transfers (one Oconee Unit at a time) will be performed to transfer back to the startup transformer. Enclosures are provided to recover essential loads after each Dead Bus transfer.

9.12 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA followed by Two Unit LOOP Loads onto the Lee Combustion Turbine (CT):

A Lee CT will be placed on the standby busses. All three Oconee Units will be aligned to their respective startup transformers. Simultaneously, all three startup transformers will be deenergized and ES channels 1 through 8 will be activated on Unit 3. Unit 3 will Block Load onto the Lee CT with LOCA loads in ; 11 seconds. Unit 1 and Unit 2 will Block Load onto the Lee CT with hot shutdown loads in a 31 seconds. An enclosure is provided to terminate ECCS flow on Unit 3. An Enclosure is also provided with contingency action in case the transfer to the Lee CT fails.

9.13 Dead Bus Transfer to the Startup Source (System Grid):

After loading onto the Lee CT, Dead Bus Transfers (one Oconee Unit at a time) will be performed to transfer back to the startup transformer. Enclosures are provided to recover essential loads after each dead bus transfer.

Page 13: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 13 of 202

9.14 System Realignment: Procedural guidance will be provided to align the plant systems and components back to a normal configuration.

10.0 Data Required

10.1 Data will be obtained and recorded per TT/0/A/0610/025A.

11.0 Test Acceptance Criteria

11.1 Test 12.1

Keowee starts and accelerates the connected loads simulating a 3 unit LOOP loading on the underground path.

* Both Keowee Units emergency start on simulated LOOP actuation.

* The Keowee underground unit obtains rated speed 128.6 rpm (122.2 - 135 rpm) and voltage 13.8kV (13.5 - 14.1kV) 5 23 seconds after emergency start actuation.

* Each Oconee unit automatically load sheds and transfers to receive power from the standby bus.

* The connected 4kV motors (HPI, LPSW, MDEFW, LPI) and 600V RBCU LOOP loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

11.2 Test 12.2:

Keowee separates from the system grid and starts and accelerates the connected loads simulating a 3 unit LOOP loading on the overhead path.

* Both Keowee Units emergency start on simulated LOOP actuation.

* The overhead Keowee unit separates from the system grid on emergency start actuation.

* The switchyard isolation logic properly isolates the Yellow Bus from the system grid.

* The Keowee overhead unit reaches 110% frequency decreasing following maximum load rejection 5 22 seconds.

* The connected 4kV motor (HPI, LPSW, MDEFW, LPI) and 600V RBCU LOOP loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

Page 14: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 14 of 202

11.3 Test 12.3: 11.3.1 Keowee, loaded while accelerating at reduced voltage

and frequency, starts and accelerates the connected LOCA and LOOP loads on the underground path.

* Both Keowee Units emergency start on engineered safeguards actuation.

* Oconee units 1 & 3 automatically load shed and transfer to receive power from the standby bus.

* The Keowee underground unit accepts load at reduced voltage and frequency

* The connected 4kV motor (HPI, LPI, LPSW, RBS, MDEFW) and 600V RBCU LOCA loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

* The non-load shed load are energized following the transfer to the standby bus.

* All ES actuated MOVs operate to their ES position.

11.3.2 LPI flow greater than 3000 gpm per pump 5 38 seconds.

11.4 Test 12.4: 11.4.1 Keowee separates from the system grid and starts and

accelerates the connected LOCA and LOOP loads on the underground path following load rejection.

* Both Keowee Units emergency start on engineered safeguards actuation.

* Oconee units 1 & 3 automatically load shed and transfer to receive power from the standby bus.

* The Keowee underground units ACBs (eg. ACB-2 & 4 for Unit 2) open on emergency start actuation.

* The Keowee underground unit reaches 110% frequency decreasing following maximum load rejection 5 22 seconds.

* The connected 4kV motor (HPI, LPI, LPSW, RBS, MDEFW) and 600V RBCU LOCA loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

* The non-load shed load are energized following the transfer to the standby bus.

Page 15: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 15 of 202

* All ES actuated MOVs operate to their ES position.

11.4.2 LPI flow greater than 3000 gpm per pump 538 seconds.

11.5 Test 12.5:

11.5.1 Keowee separates from the system grid and starts and accelerates the connected LOCA loads followed by 2 unit LOOP loads on the underground path following load rejection.

* Both Keowee Units emergency start on engineered safeguards actuation.

* The Keowee underground units ACBs (eg. ACB-2 & 4 for Unit 2) open on emergency start actuation.

* The Keowee underground unit reaches 110% frequency decreasing following maximum load rejection < 22 seconds.

* Each Oconee unit automatically load sheds and transfers to receive power from the standby bus.

* The connected 4kV motor (HPI, LPI, LPSW, RBS, MDEFW) and 600V RBCU LOCA loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

* The non-load shed loads are energized following the transfer to the standby bus.

* All ES actuated MOVs operate to their ES position.

11.5.2 LPI flow greater than 3000 gpm per pump 5 38 seconds.

11.6 Test 12.6:

11.6.1 The LEE CT starts and accelerates the connected LOCA loads followed by 2 unit LOOP loads.

* Each Oconee unit automatically load sheds and transfers to receive power from the standby bus energized by a LEE T.

* The connected 4kV motor (HPI, LPI, LPSW, RBS, MDEFW) and 600V RBCU LOCA loads start, accelerate and continue to operate until secured.

* The non-load shed loads are energized following the transfer to the standby bus.

* All ES actuated MOVs operate to their post ES

Page 16: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 16 of 202

position.

11.6.2 LPI flow greater than 3000 gpm per pump 5 38 seconds.

12.0 Procedure

NOTE: Sections 12.1 through 12.6 may be performed in any order as determined by the Test Coordinator. Unless otherwise noted individual substeps in each section must be performed in order.

12.1 TRANSFER OF UNITS 1 2, AND 3 HOT S/D LOADS TO THE KEOWLE UNDERGROUND UNIT.

12.1.1 The Management Designee and Test Coordinator will conduct a pre-job briefing with the Shift Operating Crew and Keowee Technical Support for this particular transfer.

12.1.1.1 The Test Method for this transfer, communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

* Management Designee

NOTE: Opening the Knife switches will provide sync protection when performing annual dead bus transfers from the STBY Busses to the startup transformer.

12.1.2 OPEN and Blue tag the following Knife Switches to block the normal startup sync relay:

/ *__ Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 1

* Blue tag placed

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 1

* Blue tag placed

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 2

* Blue tag placed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2

Blue tag placed

Page 17: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 17 of 202

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 3

* Blue tag placed

/ -- * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3

* Blue tag placed

12.1.3 Verify shutdown OR have HVAC personnel shut down the A AND B chillers.

12.1.4 Set up and maintain open communications between Unit 1 and 2 Control Room, Unit 3 Control Room, and Keowee Hydro Station during this test.

12.1.5 Verify aligned OR align Keowee Unit 2 to the Keowee Underground patiK

12.1.6 Verify energized OR energize the CT-5 Transformer from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply). Do NOT CLOSE the SL BKR's onto the STBY Busses.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps' shutdown and starting steps may be repeated at the Test Coordinators discretion.

12.1.7 Prepare plant equipment for simulated LOOP.

--- 12.1.7.1 Have operations verify that the Primary and Secondary equipment are aligned per Enclosures 13.1, 13.2, and 13.3.

12.1.7.2 Increase LPSW flow by establishing %5000 GPM through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ * For 1A LPI Cooler, place 1 LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* For 1B LPI Cooler, place 1LPSW-252 (11B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

12.1.7.3 Increase LPSW flow by establishing s5000 GPM through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ _* For 2A LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 GPM.

Page 18: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 18 of 202

/_ _* For 2B LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 GPM.

12.1.7.4 Increase LPSW flow by establishing ;5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

12.1.7.5 Start OR verify running 1A OR 1B LPI pump on Unit 1.

/ * 1A LPI PUMP

/ * 18 LPI PUMP

12.1.7.6 Start OR verify running 2A OR 2B LPI pump on Unit 2.

/ * 2A LPI PUMP / * 2B LPI PUMP

12.1.7.7 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 1.

S _* 1A CC PUMP

* 1B CC PUMP

12.1.7.8 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 2.

/- 2A CC PUMP

/ * 2B CC PUMP

12.1.7.9 Start the MDEFW pumps on Unit 1.

/ * 1AMD EFDWP

/ * 1B MD EFDWP

12.1.7.10 Start the MD EFDWP on Unit 2.

Page 19: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 19 of 202

0/ * 2A MD EFDWP

/ * 2B MD EFDWP

12.1.7.11 Start the Unit 1 HPI pumps.

/ * 1A HPI

/* 1B HPI

12.1.7.12 Start the Unit 2 HPI pumps

_/_ * 2A HPI PUMP

/__* 2B HPI PUMP

12.1.7.13 Start the MD EFDWP pumps on Unit 3.

/ * 3A MD EFDWP

/ * 3B MD EFDWP

12.1.7.14 Start OR verify running the 3A OR 3B Component CoolingTCC) pump on Unit 3.

/ 3A CC PUMP

_/ _* 3B CC PUMP

12.1.7.15 Start the 3A AND 3B HPI pumps on Unit 3.

-- / * Place 3A HPI PUMP TO ON

/ * Place 3B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.1.7.16 OPEN OR verify OPEN the following PCB's:

_ * PCB-17

/_ * PCB-26

/_ * PCB-28

NOTE: Step 12.1.8.2 will cause a loss of power on all three Oconee Units. The Keowee Underground Unit should energize all three Unit's MFB's in z 31 seconds.

12.1.8 Initiate a transfer to the Keowee Underground Unit by performing the following:

Page 20: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 20 of 202

-- j12.1.8.1 Have the Keowee Operator start the D.C. Oil Lift pumps for both Keowee Units.

12.1.8.2 Simultaneously perform the following:

* Open PCB-18

* Open PCB-27

* Open PCB-30

* Actuate Keowee Emergency Start from the Oconee Unit 2 Control Room by placing the KEOWEE EMER START CHANNEL B switch to KEOWEE EMER START.

. 12.1.8.3Notify Keowee Operator to place the D.C. Oil Lift pump Control Switches to AUTO.

12.1.9 Re-energize the Startup Transformers from the 230kV Switchyard at approximately 40 seconds after deenergizing them in step 12.1.8.2

12.1.9.1 Synchronize and Close PCB-1 8.

- 12.1.9.2Synchronize and Close PCB-27.

-12.1.9.3Synchronize and Close PCB-30.

12.1.9.4 Synchronize and Close PCB-1 7

--- 12.1.9.5 Synchronize and Close PCB-26

--- 12.1.9.6 Synchronize and Close PCB-28

12.1.10 Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

12.1.11 Unit 2 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2).

12.1.12 Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer Unit 3).

12.1.13 Start additional loads per Enclosure 13.6 and 13.7 as requested by the Test Coordinator.

12.1.14 Transfer Units 1, 2, and 3 back to the startup transformers by performing the following:

Page 21: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 21 of 202

UNIT 1: 12.1.14.1 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 1A RBCU

* 1B RBCU

* 1C RBCU

Time

CAUTION: Step 12.1.14.3 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. If any Keowee Unit is receiving auxiliary power from CX, power will be temporarily lost until transfer is complete.

12.1.14.2 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ *- MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.14.3 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/ * Sl1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB 1 OPEN

_/ * S2 j STBY BUS 2 TO MFB 2 OPEN

12.1.14.4 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/-- * Ell MFB1 STARTUP FDR

_/ * E2, MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.1.14.5 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

_ _ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

S/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.14.6 Have Unit 1 Control Room begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

Page 22: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 22 of 202

Unit 2:

12.1.14.7 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 2A RBCU

* 2B RBCU

* 2C RBCU

*

Time

NOTE: Step 12.1.14.9 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 2. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB monitor panel. The SSF will lose power during this transfer.

12.1.14.8 Place the following Unit 2 transfer switches to MANUAL:

/-- - * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.14.9 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's:

* S12 STANDBY BUS 1 TO MFB 1

/ * S22 STANDBY BUS 2 TO MFB 2

12.1.14.10 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

-/-* El 2 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E22 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.1.14.11 Place the following Unit 2 transfer switches to AUTO.

_/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/__* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.14.12 Unit 2 Control Room begin Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dea Bus Transfer for Unit 2).

Page 23: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 23 of 202

Unit 3: 12.1.14.13 Sto all operating RBCU's by placing switch to

OFF:

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

Time

NOTE: Step 12.1.14.15 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

12.1.14.14 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL.

/.* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

-- /- STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ _* MFB 1 AUTO/MAN

- / * MFB 2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.14.15 Simultaneously, OPEN the following BKR's:

/ -* S13 STANDBY BUS 1 to MFB 1

/ * S2 3 STANDBY BUS 2 to MFB 2

12.1.14.16 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ _* E13 MFB 1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E23 MFB 2 STARTUP FDR

12.1.14.17 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

/__* STANDBY BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/STANDBY BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

1 2.1.14.18 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3).

Page 24: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

3rd DRAFT Page 24 of 202

12.1.15 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

12.1.15.1 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following (3UB1) to reset the Keowee emergency start signal rom Unit 3:

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

_/ _* KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.1.15.2 In the Unit 1&2 Control Room at the Keowee Control Panel, place the following transfer switches to MANUAL:

* CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/__*_ CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.1.15.3 OPEN OR verify OPEN the following BKR's:

/ _* SK1 CT-4 STBY BUS 1 FEEDER

/ .* SK2 CT-4 STBY BUS 2 FEEDER

12.1.15.4 In Unit 2 Control Room, lace the Keowee EMER START CHANNEL B switc to OFF.

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency start signal may allow the Keowee Units to AUTO-SYNC to the gird.

12.1.15.5 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from the Unit 1 and Unit 2 Control Room.

__/-* Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

/_ * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

/ * Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

/___* Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

12.1.15.6 Notify Keowee Operations personnel to shutdown both Keowee Units.

12.1.15.7 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

_/ * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 25: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 25 of 202

NOTE: At the discretion of the Test Coordinator, steps 12.1.11.8, 12.1.11.9 AND 12.1.11.10 may be marked N/A to leave the LPSW systems aligned for the next test.

12.1.16 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NQT in service:

S/... * For 1 A LPI Cooler, throttle close 1 LPSW-251 (1 A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve f0 GPM.

/ * For 1B LPI Cooler, throttle close 1LPSW-252 (1 B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve %0 GPM.

12.1.17 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

For 2A LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve ;r0 gpm.

L __* For 2B LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve =0 gpm.

12.1.18 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve ft0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve s=0 gpm.

12.1.19 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operations, Engineering, and management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition Results

* Test Acceptance Criteria

* Lessons learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment Repairs

* Other concerns

12.1.20 CLOSE and remove Blue tag on the following Knife Switches on the normal startup sync relay:

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25 B 1

Page 26: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 26 of 202

* Blue tag removed

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B21

* Blue tag removed

/-* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 2

* Blue tag removed

/_* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2

* Blue tag removed

/-* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B13 * Blue tag removed

/_* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3

* Blue tag removed

12.1.21 IF the remaining portions of the tests are to be canceled or delayed, then shutdown the Lee CT at the Test Coordinator's discretion per OP/0/A/ 1107/003 (100 KV Power Supply).

Page 27: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 27 of 202

12.2 BLOCK LOADING ON THE KEOWEE OVERHEAD AFTER KEOWEE LOAD REJECTION AND S.Y. ISOLATION

CAUTION: RBCU's must run for 30 minutes before the power transfer.

12.2.1 Start or verify operating in HIGH, two RBCUs on each unit:

Time

* 1A RBCU * 2A RBCU * 3B RBCU

* 1B RBCU * 2B RBCU * 3B RBCU

S1 C RBCU * 2C RBCU * 3C RBCU

12.2.2 Test Coordinator and Management Designee will conduct a pre-job briefing with the Shift Operations crew and Keowee Tech Support for this transfer. Test method, communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

* Management Designee

12.2.3 Verify shutdown OR have HVAC personell shut down the A AND B chillers.

12.2.4 Verify energized OR energize the CT-5 Transformer from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply). Do NOT CLOSE the SL BKR's onto the STBY Busses.

-- 12.2.5 Verify aligned OR align Keowee Unit 2 to the Keowee Overhead path.

12.2.6 Set up and maintain open communications between Unit 1, Unit 2, Unit 3 Control Room's, and Keowee Hydro Station.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps' shutdown and starting steps may be repeated at the Test Coordinators discretion.

12.2.7 Prepare Plant equipment for simulated LOOP:

12.2.7.1 Have Operations verify that primary and secondary equipment are aligned per the requirements of Enclosure 13.1, 13.2, and 13.3.

Page 28: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 28 of 202

NOTE: Connecting the following jumpers will simulate a generator lockout to the E breakers and provide them a close signal when the startup transformers are re-energized from the Keowee Overhead Unit following S.Y. Isolation.

12.2.7.2 Connect jumpers between terminals as described below and hang blue tags:

a. Cabinet 1 EB4

/I * Terminal GB10 to terminal GB10C (Reference 0-71 5K)

* Place Blue tag

* Terminal GB5 to terminal GB5C (Reference 0-71 5K)

* Place Blue tag

b. Cabinet 2EB4

/__* Terminal GB1 1 to terminal GB 11 C (Reference 0-171 5N)

* Place Blue tag

* Terminal GB10 to terminal GB10C (Reference 0-171 5N)

* Place Blue tag

c. , Cabinet 3EB4

/ - * Terminal D45(GA24) to terminal D46 (GA26) (Reference 0-271 5D)

* Place Blue tag

/ __* Terminal D75 (GB1 2) to terminal D76 (GB1 8) (Reference 0-271 5D)

* Place Blue tag

12.2.7.3 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO:

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ _* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

Page 29: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 29 of 202

12.2.7.4 Notify Keowee Operations to perform the following:

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Underground Unit and place it on the System Grid at m 0-10 MWe.

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Overhead Unit and place it on the System Grid at the Maximum permissible Load.

NOTE: Steps 12.2.4.3, 12.2.4.4 AND 12.2.4.5 may be marked N/A IF LPSW System flow was NOT decreased following the previous test.

12.2.7.5 Increase LPSW flow by establishing 5000 GPM through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ _* For 1A LPI Cooler, place 1LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive u5000 gpm.

/ _* For 1B LPI Cooler, place 1LPSW-252 (1B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive s5000 gpm.

12.2.7.6 Increase LPSW flow by establishing ;5000 GPM through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ _* For 2A LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive ;5000 GPM.

/ _* For 2B LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive ;5000 GPM.

12.2.7.7 Increase LPSW flow by establishing m5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive s5000 gpm.

12.2.7.8 Start OR verify running the 1A OR 1B LPI pump on Unit 1.

/. * 1 A LPI PUMP

Page 30: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 30 of 202

/ * 1B LPI PUMP

12.2.7.9 Start OR verify running the 2A OR 2B LPI pump on Unit 2.

* 2A LPI PUMP

* 2B LPI PUMP

12.2.7.10Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 1.

* 1A CC PUMP

/ B CC PUMP

12.2.7.11 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 2.

/ * 2A CC PUMP

* 2B CC PUMP

- 12.2.7.12 Start OR verify running 2 of the 3 LPSW pumps for the shared Units 1 and 2 LPSW System.

12.2.7.13 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 1.

/__* 1A MD EFDWP

* 1B MD EFDWP

12.2.7.14 Start the MD EFW pumps on Unit 2.

/ 2A MD EFDWP

/--* 2B MD EFDWP

12.2.7.15 Start the 1A and 1B HPI pumps Unit 1.

* Place 1 A HPI PUMP TO ON

_ _/ * Place 1 B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.2.7.16 Start the 2A and 2B HPI pumps on Unit 2.

/ * Place 2A HPI PUMP TO ON

/--* Place 2B HPI PUMP TO ON

Page 31: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 31 of 202

12.2.7.17 Start OR verify running the 3A AND 3B Component Cooling7CC) pumps on Unit 3.

- /_ * 3A CC Pump

/ * 3B CC PUMP

12.2.7.18 Start the MD EFDWP's on Unit 3.

* 3A MD EFDWP

* 3B MD EFDWP

12.2.7.19 Start the 3A AND 3B HPI pumps on Unit 3.

- / _* Place 3A HPI PUMP TO ON

/..* Place 3B HPI PUMP TO ON

NOTE: Step 12.2.8 will cause a loss of power to all three Oconee Units. A S.Y. Isolation will occur and the Keowee Overhead Unit will load reject energize the startup transformers in ; 20 seconds.

12.2.8 Notify Technician in 230KV relay house to actuate a S.Y. Isolation by performing the following:

NOTE: Keys from the Unit 1 AND 2 Key Locker will be needed to enter the 230 KV S.Y. Relay house and cabinet RF-1 7.

12.2.8.1 When notified by the Unit 1&2 Control Room, simultaneously depress the following test switches to activate S.Y. Isolation: (located in the 230 KV S.Y. Relay House Cabinet RF-17):

* 230 KV RED AND YEL BUS X PHASE TEST

/ * 230 KV RED AND YEL BUS Y PHASE TEST

12.2.9 Notify Unit 1 control room to begin enclosure 13.9 (Actions following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

12.2.10 Notify Unit 2 control room to begin enclosure 13.10 (Actions following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2).

12.2.11 Notify Unit 3 control room to begin enclosure 1 3.11 (Actions following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3).

12.2.12 Verify the following statalarms are ILLUMINATED:

* 1SA1 5-E6 EL SWYD ISOLATION CONFIRMED CHNL "A" LOGIC

Page 32: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 32 of 202

S1 SA1 4-E6 EL SWYD ISOLATION CONFIRMED CHNL "B" LOGIC

12.2.13 Verify OPEN the following PCB's:

* PCB-8 * PCB-21 * PCB-33

* PCB-1 2 * PCB-24

* PCB-1 5 * PCB-26

* PCB-17 * PCB-28

12.2.14 Verify CLOSED the following PCB's:

* PCB-9 - PCB-27

* PCB-1 8 __* PCB-30

12.2.15 Reset the External Grid Trouble Protection System by depressing the reset pushbuttons for both channels from Unit 2 Control Room.

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 2 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 2 RESET

12.2.16 Verify the following statalarms EXTINGUISHED:

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-2)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-4)

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-1)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-3)

NOTE: Essential Load recovery per Enclosures 13.9, 13.10 and 13.11 should be completed prior to synchronizing the Keowee Overhead Unit to the System Grid. Adding or removing electrical loads while synchronizing may make synchronizing difficult.

12.2.17 Reconnect the System Grid to the 230KV Yellow Bus and startup transformers by performing the following:

Page 33: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 33 of 202

a. Verify Enclosures 13.9, 13.10 and 13.11 are complete as required by the Test Coordinator and OPS Shift Manager.

b. Notify Keowee Operations to transfer control of the Keowee Overhead Unit to Oconee.

NOTES: 1. Keowee speed changes should be made slowly. Changing Keowee speed will change the speed of running motors for Oconee Units receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit.

2. The following steps may be performed concurrently. Constant communications should be established with Keowee Operations. The Keowee Operator should notify Oconee if any problems arise during speed and voltage adjustments.

c. Depress and hold the PCB-8 SYNC CHECK pushbutton.

d. Use the Keowee Overhead Unit SPEED CHANGER MOTOR to synchronize the Keowee Overhead Unit (Yellow Bus supply) to the 230 KV Red Bus.

1. WHEN synchronization is achieved THEN Close PCB-8.

12.2.18 Notify Keowee Operations to perform the following:

12.2.18.1 Return control of the Keowee Overhead Unit to Keowee Hydro Station.

12.2.18.2 Run Keowee Overhead Unit to speed/unload condition.

12.2.18.3 Open the Overhead ACB for the Keowee Overhead Hydro Unit.

12.2.19 Obtain Area Operating Center permission and CLOSE the following PCBs:

* PCB-12 * PCB-15 * PCB-17

* PCB-18 * PCB-26 * PCB-27

* PCB-28 * PCB-30 * PCB-33

12.2.20 CLOSE PCB-21 by performing the following:

12.2.20.1 Place the PCB-21 SYNCHRONIZING switch to SYNCH.

12.2.20.2 CLOSE PCB-21 GENERATOR 1.

Page 34: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 34 of 202

12.2.20.3 Turn the PCB-21 SYNCHRONIZING switch to OFF

12.2.21 CLOSE PCB-24 by performing the following:

12.2.21.1 Place the PCB-24 SYNCHRONIZING switch to SYNCH.

--- 12.2.21.2 CLOSE PCB-24 GENERATOR 2.

12.2.21.3 Turn the PCB-24 SYNCHRONIZING switch to OFF.

12.2.22 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

NOTE: A S.Y. Isolation will Emergency Start both Keowee Units from the Unit 1 Emergency Start circuitry. However, if the MFB Monitor Panel timed out on Units 2 and/or 3, then a Keowee Emergency Start signal will have been actuated by these Unit(s). This procedure will depress the reset buttons for all three Oconee Units.

12.2.22.1 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following (3UB1) to reset the Keowee emergency start signal rom Unit 3. (3UB1)

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.2.22.2 Place the following transfer switches to MANUAL (2AB3).

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/--* CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.2.22.3 Open OR verify open the following BKR's:

/ * SKI CT-4 STANDBY BUS 1 FEEDER

__/_* SK2 CT-4 STANDBY BUS 2 FEEDER

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency Start Signal will cause both Keowee Units to Automatically shutdown since they were connected to the grid when the Emergency Start Signal was received.

12.2.22.4 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from Unit 1 and Unit 2 Control Room.

-/-_/-a. Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

/ b. Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

Page 35: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 35 of 202

/---c. Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

_/____d. Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

12.2.22.5 Have Keowee Operations verify both Keowee Units are shutdown.

12.2.22.6 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO:

____a. CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/--b. CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.2.23 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ * For 1A LPI Cooler, throttle close 1 LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive =0 GPM.

/ * For 11B LPI Cooler, throttle close 1LPSW-252 (11B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive f0 GPM.

12.2.24 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ * For 2A LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive s0 gpm.

/_ _* For 2B LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive -_0 gpm.

12.2.25 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive f0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive o0 gpm.

12.2.26 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operations, Engineering, and Management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition Results

* Test Acceptance Criteria

* Lessons Learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment Repairs

Page 36: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 36 of 202

* Other concerns

12.2.27 IF the remaining portions of the tests are to be canceled or delayed, then shutdown the Lee CT at the Test Coordinator's discretion per OP/0/A/ 1107/003 (100 KV Power Supply).

12.2.28 Disconnect jumpers between terminals as described below and remove Blue tags:

a. Cabinet 1 EB4

* Terminal GB10 to terminal GB10C (Reference 0-71 5K)

* Blue Remove tag

* Terminal GB5 to terminal GB5C (Reference 0-71 5K)

* Blue tag removed

b. Cabinet 2EB4

/ Terminal GB 11 to terminal GB1 IC (Reference 0-171 5N)

* Blue tag removed

/ * Terminal GB10 to terminal GB1OC (Reference 0-171 5N)

* Blue tag removed

c. Cabinet 3EB4

/ * Terminal D45(GA24) to terminal D46 (GA26) (Reference 0-271 5D)

* Blue tag removed

/--* Terminal D75 (GB12) to terminal D76 (GB18) (Reference 0-271 5D)

* Blue tag removed

12.2.29 Place the following transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/___*-- MFB2 AUTO/MAN

Page 37: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 37 of 202

1 2.3 BLOCK LOADING ONE UNIT LOCA AND ONE UNIT LOOP LOADS ON THE KEOWEE UNDERGROUND SIMULTANEOUSLY WHILE ACCELERATING (sl 1 SECONDS).

CAUTION: RBCU's must run for 30 minutes before the power transfer.

12.3.1 Start or verify operating in HIGH, two RBCUs on each unit:

Time S1 A RBCU * 2A RBCU * 3 RBCU

* B RBCU * 2B RBCU ----- * 3B RBCU

S1C RBCU * 2 RBCU---- * 3 RBCU

12.3.2 Test Coordinator and Management Designee will conduct a

re-job briefing with the Shift Operations crew and Keowee Tech Support for this transfer. Test method,

communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

* * Management Designee

NOTE: Opening the Knife switches will provide sync protection when performing amnual dead bus transfers from the STBY Busses to the startup transformer..

12.3.3 OPEN and Blue tag the following Knife Switches to block the normal startup sync relay:

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B11

* Blue tag placed

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2

* Blue tag placed

/ __* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1

* Blue tag placed

/ -* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B23

* Blue tag placed

Page 38: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 38 of 202

12.3.4 Verify aligned or notify the HVAC personel to align A and B Chiller as follows:

12.3.4.1 A Chiller shutdown

.12.3.4.2B Chiller in service

12.3.5 Perform Enclosure 13.5 (Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignmen#

12.3.6 Verify energized OR energize the CT-5 Transformer from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply). Do NOT CLOSE the SL BKR's onto the STBY Bus.

-.. 12.3.7 Verify aligned or align Keoweee Unit 2 to the Keowee Underground path.

-- 12.3.8 Set up and maintain open communications between Unit 1, Unit 2, Unit 3 Control Room's, and Keowee Hydro Station.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps may be stopped and started at the discretion of the Test Coordinator. .12.3.9 Prepare Plant equipment for simulated LOCA/LOOP:

__1 2.3.9.1 Have Operations verify that primary and secondary equipment are aligned per the requirements of Enclosure 13.1 AND 13.3.

NOTE: When the switchable jumpers are in the ON position the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps will stop while the control room switch is in the STOP position but will restart when the switch returns to the NEUTRAL position. IF necessary, the pumps can be stopped by positioning the jumper switch to OFF and then placing the control room switch to STOP. These jumpers will make the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps start when the Main Feeder Busses are re-energized following a loss of power.

12.3.10 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps to ON:

12.3.10.1 Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C.

--- 12.3.10.2 Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C.

Page 39: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 39 of 202

NOTE: The test module switch must remain in each position for ? 3 seconds. This step will cause control room alarms and simulates an ES actuation for Unit 1's EPSL.

-- 12.3.10.3 On Unit 1 Rotate the logic test module switch in the ES cabinet #4, Channel 1, counterclockwise to the Test position #9.

-- 12.3.10.4 On Unit 1 Depress MANUAL pushbutton at the ES RZ Modules for "LOAD SHED and STBY BKR 1".

12.3.10.5 OPEN or verify open the following PCB's

* PCB-17

* PCB-28

12.3.10.6 Increase LPSW flow by establishing %5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to acheive s5000 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow > 9000 GPM, start the second Unit 3 LPSW pump.

12.3.10.7 Start OR verify running the 1A OR 1B LPI pump on Unit 1.

/ * 1A LPI PUMP

/_ I * lB LPI PUMP

12.3.10.8 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 1.

/ * 1A CC PUMP

_/ * 1B CC PUMP

12.3.11 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 1.

/ * 1A MD EFDWP

Page 40: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 40 of 202

_* 1 B MD EFDWP

12.3.12 Start the 1A and 1B HPI pumps Unit 1.

-/. _* Place 1 A HPI PUMP TO ON

Place 1 B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.3.13 Start the MD EFDWP's on Unit 3.

-- /--* 3A MD EFDWP

/ _* 3B MD EFDWP

NOTE: Step 12.3.14.2 will cause a loss of power to Oconee Unit 1 AND Unit 3. Unit 3 will have an Engineered Safeguards activation of channels 1 through 8.

12.3.14 Using the countdown method discussed in the pre-job briefing, perform the following steps:

--- 12.3.14.1 Have the Keowee Operator start the D.C. Oil Lift pumps for both Keowee Units.

12.3.15 Simultaneously, perform the following:

* Open PCB-18

* Open PCB-30

* Actuate ES Channels 1 and 2 ON UNIT 3

---- 12.3.15.1 Within 5 Seconds of actuating ES Channels 1 and 2 on Unit 3, actuate ES Channels 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

12.3.16 Notify Keowee Operator to place the D.C. Oil Lift pumps Control Switches to AUTO.

12.3.17 Re-energize the Units 1 AND 3 Startup Transformers from the 23T KV Switchyard a 40 Seconds after de-energizing them in step 12.3.14.2.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-1 8.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-30.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-17.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-28.

12.3.18 On Unit 1 depress the AUTO pushbutton at the ES RZ modules

Page 41: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 41 of 202

for LOAD SHED and STBY BKR 1.

12.3.19 Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

12.3.20 Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3).

NOTE: Test module switch must remain in the push position ?: 3 seconds.

12.3.21 On Unit 1, Rotate the logic test module switch in ES cabinet #4, channel #1, to Operate position (push in)

12.3.22 Transfer Units 1 AND 3 back to the startup transformers by performing the following:

UNIT 1:

12.3.23 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* A RBCU

* 1B RBCU

* 1C RBCU

Time

NOTE: Step 12.3.22.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. If any Keowee Unit is receiving auxiliary power from CX, power will be temporarily lost until transfer is complete.

12.3.23.1 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/___* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

_ / _ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

___*. MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.3.23.2 Simultaneously open the following BKR's

* S11 STANDBY 1 TO MFB1

* S21 STANDBY 2 TO MFB2

Page 42: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 42 of 202

12.3.23.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ * Ell MFB1 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

/- * E2, MFB2 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

12.3.23.4 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

_ /--* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

--/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.3.23.5 Have Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Folowing Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

Unit 3:

12.3.24 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU * 3C RBCU

Time

NOTE: Step 12.3.23.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

12.3.24.1 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL

/_ _* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/__-* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

-/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.3.24.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/ * S13 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

/. * S23 STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

12.3.24.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

Page 43: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 43 of 202

/_ * El 3 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

* E23 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.3.24.4 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ __* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

..12.3.24.5 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

12.3.25 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

12.3.25.1 On the UNIT 3 RZ MODULES, verify OR place the following RZ Modules to MANUAL:

/ * KEOWEE START CHANNEL A

/ * KEOWEE START CHANNEL B

/ * STBY BUS FDR BKR 1

/ * STBY BUS FDR BKR 2

---/ * LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 1

/ * LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 2

12.3.25.2 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following 3UB1) to reset the Keowee emergency start signal

from Unit 3.

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

/ _* KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.3.25.3 In the Unit 1 &2 Control Room, at the Keowee Control Panel, place the following transfer switches to MANUAL:

-_/ -* CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.3.25.4 OPEN OR verify OPEN the following BKR's:

* SK1 CT-4 STBY BUS 1 FEEDER

* SK2 CT-4 STBY BUS 2 FEEDER

Page 44: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 44 of 202

12.3.25.5 Notify Keowee to verify QR place the D.C. Oil Lift pumps Control Switches to AUTO.

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency Start signal may allow the Keowee Units to AUTO-SYNC to the grid.

12.3.25.6 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from Unit 1 and Unit 2 Control Room.

_/_ * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

/ _* Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

12.3.25.7 Have Keowee Operations Shutdown both Keowee Units.

12.3.25.8 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO:

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

// * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.3.26 Reset ES Digital Channels 1 through 8 in the Unit 3 Control Room.

12.3.27 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.13 (Unit 3 Post ES Actuation Alignment).

NOTE: At the discretion of the Test Coordinator, step 12.3.25 may be marked N/A in order to leave the LPSW system aligned for the next test.

12.3.28 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive -0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to acheive -0 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow < 9000 GPM, stop one of the two operating Unit 3 LPSW pumps.

12.3.29 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operations, Engineering, and Management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition

* Test Accpetance Criteria

Page 45: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 3rd DRAFT Page 45 of 202

* Lessons learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment Repairs * Other concerns

12.3.30 IF the remaining portions of the tests are to be canceled or delayed, then shutdown the Lee CT at the Test Coordinator's discretion per OP/0/A/ 1107/003 (100 KV Power Supply).

12.3.31 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps to OFF:

/ _. Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C.

L 2. Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-2C.

12.3.32 CLOSE and remove Blue tag on the following Knife Switches on the normal startup sync relay:

/_* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 1

* Blue tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 1

* Blue tag removed

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B13

* Blue tag removed

/_* Knife switch. 10 on relay 25B2 3

* Blue tag removed

Page 46: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

12.4 BLOCK LOADING ONE UNIT LOCA AND ONE UNIT LOOP LOAD ONTO THE KEOWEE UNDERGROUND SIMULTANEOUSLY AFTER KEOWEE LOAD REJECTION

* (a 20 SECONDS). CAUTION:

RBCU's must run for 230 minutes before the power transfer.

12.4.1 Start or verify operating in HIGH two RBCU's on each unit:

1A RBCU __* 2A RBCU _* 3A RBCU

. * 1B RBCU -_-* 2B RBCU _ 3B RBCU

* C RBCU -- * 2C RBCU * 3C RBCU

12.4.2 The Management Designee and Test Coordinator will conduct a pre-job briefing with the Shift Operating Crew and Keowee Technical Support for this particular transfer.

12.4.2.1 The Test Method for this transfer communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

* Management Designee

* NOTE: Opening the following Knife switches will provide Sync protection when performing manual dead bus transfers from the STBY Busses to the startup transformers.

12.4.3 Open and Blue Tag the following Knife Switches to block the normal/startup sync relay.

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B11 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B21 * Blue Tag

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 3 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3 - *Blue Tag

12.4.4 Verify aligned or notify the HVAC personnel to align A and B Chiller as follows:

12.4.4.1 A Chiller shutdown

-_12.4.4.2B Chiller in service

12.4.5 Perform Enclosure 13.5 (Unit 3 ES Component

Page 47: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 47 of 202

Verification/Alignment).

1,2.4.6 Verify energized or energize CT-5 Transformer from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply). DO NOT close the SL BKRs onto the STBY BUSES.

12.4.7 Verify aligned or align Keowee Unit 2 to the Keowee Underground path.

12.4.8 Set-up and maintain open communications between Unit 1 and 2 Control Room, Unit 3 Control Room, and Keowee Hydro Station.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps shutdown and starting steps may be repeated at the Test Coordinators discretion.

12.4.9 Prepare Plant equipment for simulated LOCA/LOOP:

- _12.4.9.1 Have Operations verify that primary and secondary equipment are aligned per the requirements of Enclosure 13.1 and 13.3.

NOTE: When the switchable jumpers are in the ON position the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps will stop while the control room switch is in the STOP position but will restart when the switch returns to the NEUTRAL position. If necessary, the pumps can be stopped by positioning the jumper switch to OFF and then placing the control room switch to STOP. These jumpers will make the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps start when the Main Feeder Busses are re-energized following a loss of power.

12.4.9.2 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to ON:

a. Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

b. Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

12.4.9.3 Notify Keowee Operations to perform the following:

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Underground Unit and place it on the System Grid at maximum permissible load.

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Overhead Unit and place it on the System Grid at 0 -10 MW.

Page 48: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 48 of 202

NOTE: The Logic Test Module switch must remain in each position for> 3 seconds. This will cause Control Room alarms and simulates an ES actuation to Unit 1 EPSL.

1 2.4.9.40n Unit 1 Rotate Logic Test Module switch in ES cabinet 4, Channel [ counterclockwise to test position #9.

12.4.9.5Depress MANUAL pushbutton at Unit 1 ES RZ Modules for LOAD SHED and STBY BKR 1.

12.4.9.6 Increase LPSW flow by establishing s5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow > 9000 GPM, start the second Unit 3 LPSW pump.

12.4.9.7 Start OR verify running 1 A OR 1 B LPI pump on Unit 1.

I * 1A LPI PUMP

/ * lB LPI PUMP

12.4.9.8 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 1.

/_ * 1A CC PUMP

/ * 1B CC PUMP

NOTE: One of the running LPSW pumps should be powered from Unit 1.

12.4.9.9 Start OR verify running 2 of the 3 LPSW pumps for the shared Units 1 and 2 LPSW System.

12.4.9.10 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 1.

_ _/ * 1AMD EFDWP

/___* B MD EFDWP

12.4.9.11 Start the 1A and lB HPI pumps on Unit 1.

_ I * Place 1 A HPI PUMP TO ON

Page 49: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 49 of 202

/1 * Place 1 B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.4.9.12 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 3.

/__* 3A MD EFDWP

/I * 3B MD EFDWP

12.4.9.13 OPEN OR verify OPEN the following PCB's:

* PCB-1 7

/__* PCB-28

NOTE: Step 12.4.10.1 will cause a loss of power on Units 1 and 3. Unit 3 will have an Engineered Safeguards actuation of channels 1 through 8.

12.4.10 Using the countdown method discussed in the pre-job briefing perform the following steps:

12.4.11 Simultaneously, perform the following:

* Open PCB-1 8

* Open PCB-30

* Actuate ES Channels 1 and 2 ON UNIT 3

12.4.11.1 Within 5 Seconds of actuating ES Channels 1 and 2 on Unit 3, actuate ES Channels 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

12.4.12 Re-energize the Startup Transformers from the 230 KV Switchyard approximately 40 Seconds after de-energizing them in step 12.4.10.1.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-1 8.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-30.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-1 7.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-28.

12.4.13 De ress AUTO pushbutton at Unit 1 ES RZ Modules for LOAD SHED and STBY BKR 1.

12.4.14 Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

12.4.15 Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3).

Page 50: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 50 of 202

NOTE: The Logic Test Module switch must remain in each position for > 3 seconds.

12.4.16 Rotate Unit 1 Logic Test Module switch in ES cabinet 4, Channel 1 counterclockwise to "OPERATE" (Push In).

12.4.17 Transfer Units 1 and 3 back to the startup transformers by

UNIT 1: performing the following:

12.4.18 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

1A RBCU

S1 B RBCU

* 1C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.4.17.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. Any Keowee Unit receiving auxiliary power form CX transformer will temporarily lose power.

12.4.18.1 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

_ _/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.18.2 Simultaneously open the following BKR's

/ * S11 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

/--_*o S2 , STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

12.4.18.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ * Ell MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/...* E21 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

Page 51: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 51 of 202

12.4.18.4 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

-- / * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.18.5 Unit 1 Control Room perform Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

UNIT 3:

12.4.19 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.4.18.2, 12.5.21 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

12.4.19.1 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/- * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.19.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/__* S1 3 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

-- / _* S2 3 STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

12.4.19.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ * El3 MFB1 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

_/ * E23 MFB2 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

12.4.19.4 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

/-- *o STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

Page 52: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 52 of 202

-/ _* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.19.5 Perform Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

12.4.20 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

12.4.20.1 On UNIT 3 RZ MODULES, verify OR place the following RZ Modules to MANUAL:

-/ * KEOWEE START CHANNEL A

/ * KEOWEE START CHANNEL B

/__* STBY BUS FDR BKR 1

/ * STBY BUS FDR BKR 2

/__* LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 1

/-- - LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 2

12.4.20.2 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following to reset the Keowee emergency start signal from Unit 3. (3UB1)

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

/__ _* KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.4.20.3 Place the following transfer switches to MANUAL (2AB3).

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.20.4 Open or verify open the following BKR's:

* SK1 CT-4 STBY BUS 1 FEEDER

-/-_* SK2 CT-4 STBY BUS 2 FEEDER

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency Start Signal will cause both Keowee Units to Automatically shut down since they were connected to the grid when the Emergency Start Signal was received.

12.4.20.5 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from Unit 1 Control Room.

/ * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

Page 53: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 53 of 202

- -/ * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

. 12.4.20.6 Have Keowee Operations verify both Keowee Units are shutdown.

12.4.20.7 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO (2AB3).

* CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

* CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.4.21 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.13 (Unit 3 Post ES Activation Alignment).

NOTE: At the discretion of the Test Coordinator, step 12.4.15 may be marked N/A in order to leave the LPSW system aligned for the next test.

12.4.22 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve =0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve r0 gpm.

*_* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow < 9000 GPM, stop one of the two operating Unit 3 LPSW pumps.

/ / 12.4.23 Reset ES Digital Channels 1 through 8 IN THE UNIT 3 Control Room.

__1 2.4.24 Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing wit

12.4.25 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operations, Engineering, and Management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition Results

* Test Acceptance Criteria

* Lessons learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment Repairs

* Other concerns

-12.4.26 I F the remaining portions of the test are to be canceled or delayed, then shutdown the Lee CT at the Test Coordinator's

Page 54: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0o/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 54 of 202

discretion per OP/0/A/1 107/003 (100 KV Power Supply.

12.4.27 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to OFF:

12.4.27.1 Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

12.4.27.2 Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

12.4.28 Close the following Knife Switches on the normal/startup sync relay and remove Blue Tags:

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B11 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B21 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 3 * Blue Tag removed

Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3 * Blue Tag removed

Page 55: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 55 of 202

12.5 BLOCK LOADING SINGLE UNIT LOCA AND TWO UNIT LOOP LOAD ONTO THE KEOWEE UNDERGROUND AFTER KEOWEE LOAD REJECTION.

CAUTION RBCU's must run for 30 minutes before the power transfer.

12.5.1 Start or verify operating in HIGH two RBCU's on each unit:

* 1A RBCU _* 2A RBCU ----- e 3A RBCU

_* 1B RBCU -_* 2B RBCU * 3B RBCU

* 1C RBCU -_* 2C RBCU _ 3C RBCU

12.5.2 The Management Designee and Test Coordinator will conduct a pre-job briefing with the Shift Operating Crew and Keowee Technical Support for this particular transfer.

12.5.2.1 The Test Method for this transfer communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

* Management Designee

NOTE: Opening the following Knife switches will provide Sync protection when performing manual dead bus transfers from the STBY Busses to the startup transformers.

12.5.3 Open and Blue Tag the following Knife Switches to block the normal/startup sync relay.

* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1

* Blue Tag

/ _* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 1 * Blue Tag

Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 2 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B13 * Blue Tag

/_ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3

Page 56: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 56 of 202

* Blue Tag

12.5.4 Verify shutdown or have HVAC personnel shutdown the A and B Chiller(s).

12.5.5 Verify energized or energize CT-5 Transformer from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply). DO NOT close the SL BKRs onto the STANDBY BUSES.

12.5.6 Verify aligned gr align Keowee Unit 2 to the Keowee Underground path.

12.5.7 Set-up and maintain open communications between Unit 1 and 2 Control Room, Unit 3 Control Room, and Keowee Hydro Station.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps shutdown and starting steps may be repeated at the Test Coordinators discretion.

12.5.8 Prepare Plant equipment for simulated LOCA/LOOP:

--- 12.5.8.1 Have Operations verify that primary and secondary equipment are aligned per the requirements of Enclosure 1 3.1, 13.2 and 13.3.

NOTE: When the switchable jumpers are in the ON position the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps will stop while the control room switch is in the STOP position but will restart when the switch returns to the NEUTRAL position. If necessary, the pumps can be stopped by positioning the jumper switch to OFF and then placing the control room switch to STOP. These jumpers will make the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps start when the Main Feeder Busses are re-energized following a loss of power.

12.5.8.2 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to ON:

-- a. Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

-- b. Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

___12.5.8.3Perform Enclosure 13.5 (Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment).

12.5.8.4 Notify Keowee Operations to perform the following:

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Underground Unit and place it on the System Grid at maximum permissible load.

Page 57: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 57 of 202

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Overhead Unit and place it on the System Grid at 0 - 10 MW.

12.5.8.5 Increase LPSW flow by establishing s5000 GPM through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service providing Decay Heat Removal:

/_ * For 1A LPI Cooler, place 1LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve -5000 gpm.

--- *. For 1 B LPI Cooler, place 1 LPSW-252 (1 B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve -5000 gpm.

12.5.8.6 Increase LPSW flow by establishing s5000 GPM through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service providing Decay Heat Removal:

-/ * For 2A LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 gpm.

/ _* For 2B LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve -,5000 gpm.

12.5.8.7 Increase LPSW flow by establishing ;5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow > 9000 GPM, start the second Unit 3 LPSW pump.

12.5.8.8 Start OR verify running 1A OR 1B LPI pump on Unit 1.

/ * 1A LPI PUMP

/--*o 1B LPI PUMP

12.5.8.9 Start OR verify running 2A OR 2B LPI pump on Unit 2.

Page 58: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 58 of 202

/. * 2A LPI PUMP

/ * 2B LPI PUMP

12.5.8.10Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 1.

__/--* 1A CC PUMP

/___ * 1B CC PUMP

12.5.8.11 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 2.

/ * 2ACCPUMP

/ * 2BCC PUMP

12.5.8.12 Start OR verify running 2 of the 3 LPSW pumps for the shared Units 1 and 2 LPSW System.

12.5.8.13 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 1.

/--* 1 A MD EFDWP

/-- 1 B MD EFDWP

12.5.8.14 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 2.

/ * 2A MD EFDWP

/ _ 2B MD EFDWP

12.5.8.15 Start the 1 A and 1 B HPI pumps on Unit 1.

-/--_*o Place 1 A HPI PUMP TO ON

/ - Place 1 B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.5.8.16 Start the 2A and 2B HPI pumps on Unit 2.

/--_* Place 2A HPI PUMP TO ON

/--_*o Place 2B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.5.8.17 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 3.

* 3A MD EFDWP

/--* 3B MD EFDWP

Page 59: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 59 of 202

12.5.8.18 OPEN OR verify OPEN the following PCB's:

/ _* PCB-1 7

* PCB-26

--/ * PCB-28

NOTE: Step 12.5.9.1 will cause a loss of power on all three Units. Unit 3 will have an Engineered Safeguards actuation of channels 1 through 8.

12.5.9 Using the countdown method discussed in the pre-job briefing perform the following steps:

12.5.10 Simultaneously, perform the following:

SOpen PCB-1 8

SOpen PCB-27

SOpen PCB-30

* Actuate ES Channels 1 and 2 ON UNIT 3

12.5.10.1 Within 5 Seconds of actuating ES Channels 1 and 2 on Unit 3, actuate ES Channels 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

12.5.11 Re-energize the Startup Transformers from the 230 KV Switchyard approximately 40 Seconds after de-energizing them in step 12.5.9.1.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-1 8.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-27.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-30.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-1 7.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-28.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-26.

12.5.12 Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

12.5.13 Unit 2 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2).

12.5.14 Unit 3 Control Room to be in Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3).

Page 60: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 60 of 202

12.5.15 Start additional loads per Enclosure 13.6 and 13.7 as requested by the Test Coordinator.

12.5.16 Transfer Units 1 2, and 3 back to the startup transformers by performing the following:

UNIT 1:

12.5.17 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 1A RBCU

* 1B RBCU

* 1C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.5.16.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. Any Keowee Unit receiving auxiliary power form CX will temporarily lose power.

12.5.17.1 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

-/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.5.17.2 Simultaneously open the following BKR's

* S1 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

* S2 , STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

12.5.17.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ _* Ell MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ --- * E2, MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.5.17.4 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/. .* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 61: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 61 of 202

12.5.17.5 Have Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

UNIT 2:

12.5.18 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 2A RBCU

2B RBCU

* 2C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.5.17.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 2. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. The SSF will lose power in this transfer.

12.5.18.1 Place the following Unit 2 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/..* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.5.18.2 Simultaneously open the following BKR's

S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

12.5.18.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

_ _/ * El 2 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E2 2 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.5.18.4 Place the following Unit 2 transfer switches to AUTO:

/__* STANDBY BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/--* STANDBY BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 62: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 62 of 202

12.5.18.5 Have Unit 2 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2).

UNIT 3:

12.5.19 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.5.18.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

12.5.19.1 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL

/ _ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

- / * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ --- * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

S/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.5.19.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

S_* S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

/_* S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

12.5.19.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

-__/ * El3 MFB1 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

/ * E23 MFB2 STARTUP FDR CLOSED

12.5.19.4 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

/__* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ _ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

___12.5.19.5 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3).

Page 63: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 63 of 202

12.5.20 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

12.5.20.1 On UNIT 3 RZ MODULES, verify OR place the following RZ Modules to MANUAL:

* KEOWEE START CHANNEL A

_ _/ * KEOWEE START CHANNEL B

/ * STBY BUS FDR BKR 1

/ * STBYBUSFDRBKR2

/__* LOAD SHED AND STBY BKR 1

/ _* LOAD SHED AND STBY BKR 2

12.5.20.2 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following to reset the Keowee emergency start signal from Unit 3 (3UB1).

-- / * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

/ * KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.5.20.3 Place the following transfer switches to MANUAL (2AB3).

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.5.20.4 Open or verify open the following BKR's:

/ * SKI CT-4 STANDBY BUS 1 FEEDER

/_ * SK2 CT-4 STANDBY BUS 2 FEEDER

Page 64: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 64 of 202

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency Start Signal will cause both Keowee Units to Automatically shutdown since they were connected to the grid when the Emergency Start Signal was received.

12.5.20.5 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from Unit 1 and Unit 2 Control Room.

/Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

* Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

/ * Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

/ _* Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

-12.5.20.6 Have Keowee Operations verify both Keowee Units are

shutdown.

12.5.20.7 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO (2AB3)

/---* CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/-- * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

___12.5.21 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.13. (Unit 3 Post ES Actuation Alignment).

NOTE: At the discretion of the Test Coordinator, steps 12.4.18.2, 12.5.21 , 12.5.22 and 12.5.23 may be marked N/A to [eave the LPSW system aligned for the next test.

12.5.22 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ * For 1A LPI Cooler, throttle close 1LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve =0 GPM.

/ * For 1B LPI Cooler, throttle close 1LPSW-252 (11B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve ft0 GPM.

12.5.23 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

For 2A LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve s0 gpm.

* For 2B LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve s0 gpm.

Page 65: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 65 of 202

12.5.24 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve A0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve %0 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow < 9000 GPM, stop one of the two operating Unit 3 LPSW pumps.

12.5.25 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operating crew, Engineering, and Management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition Results

* Test Acceptance Criteria

* Lessons learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment repairs

* Other concerns.

12.5.26 IF the remaining portions of the test are to be canceled or delayed, then shutdown the Lee CT at the Overall Test Coordinator's discretion per OP/0/A/ 1107/003 (100 KV Power Supply.

12.5.27 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to OFF:

12.5.27.1 Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

12.5.27.2 Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

12.5.28 Close the following Knife Switches on the normal/startup sync relay and remove Blue Tags:

Knife switch 10 on relay 25B11 * Blue Tag removed

/ _ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 1 * Blue Tag removed

/ _ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 2 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2

Page 66: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 66 of 202

* Blue Tag removed

S_* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 3 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B23 * Blue Tag removed

0

Page 67: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 67 of 202

12.6 BLOCK LOADING SINGLE UNIT LOCA AND TWO UNIT LOOP LOAD ONTO THE LEE COMBUSTION TURBINE.

CAUTION

RBCU's must run for 30 minutes before the power transfer.

12.6.1 Start or verify operating in HIGH two RBCU's on each unit:

* A RBCU -- * 2A RBCU __* 3A RBCU

* B RBCU __* 2B RBCU * 3B RBCU

* 1C RBCU * 2C RBCU * 3C RBCU

... 12.6.2 The Management Designee and Test Coordinator will conduct a pre-job briefing with the Shift Operating Crew and Lee Steam Station Technical Support for this particular transfer.

12.6.2.1 The Test Method for this transfer communications, and compensatory actions should be discussed.

* Test Coordinator

** Management Designee

NOTE: Opening the following Knife switches will provide Sync protection when performing manual dead bus transfers from the STBY Busses to the startup transformers.

12.6.3 Open and Blue Tag the following Knife Switches to block the normal/startup sync relay.

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 1 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B21 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 2511 2 * Blue Tag

/ __* Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B13 * Blue Tag

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3 * Blue Tag

Page 68: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 68 of 202

12.6.4 Verify shutdown or have HVAC personnel shutdown the A and B Chillers.

12.6.5 Verify energized or energize the STBY BUSES from a dedicated Lee CT for BACKUP Power per OP/0/A/1 107/03 (100 KV Power Supply).

12.6.6 Set-up and maintain open communications between Unit 1 and 2 Control Room, Unit 3 Control Room, and Lee Steam Station.

NOTE: IF initiation of test is delayed, at the discretion of the Test Coordinator, turn off pump(s). The following pumps shutdown and starting steps may be repeated at the Test Coordinators discretion.

-- 12.6.7 Prepare Plant equipment for simulated LOCA/LOOP:

12.6.7.1 Have Operations verify that primary and secondary equipment are aligned per the requirements of Enclosure 1 3.1, 13.2 and 133.

NOTE: When the switchable jumpers are in the ON position the 3A and 3B SF Cooling pumps will stop while the control room switch is in the STOP position but will restart when the switch returns to the NEUTRAL position. If necessa r, the pumps can be stopped by positioning the jumper switch to OF and then placing the control room switch to STOP. These jumpers will make the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps start when the Main Feeder Busses are re-energized following a loss of power.

12.6.7.2 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to ON:

a. Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

.. ,b. Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

____12.6.7.3Perform Enclosure 13.5 (Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment).

12.6.7.4 Notify Keowee Operations to perform the following:

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Underground Unit and place it on the System Grid at 0 - 1MW

* Perform an automatic start of the Keowee Overhead Unit and place it on the System Grid at 0 - 10 MW.

Page 69: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 69 of 202

NOTE: Steps 12.6.7.5, 12.6.7.6 and 12.6.7.7 may be marked N/A IF the LPSW flow was not reduced following the previous test.

12.6.7.5 Increase LPSW flow by establishing -5000 GPM through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

_ _* For 1A LPI Cooler, place 1LPSW-251 (1A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 gpm.

/ _* For 1 B LPI Cooler, place 1 LPSW-252 (1 B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve e5000 gpm.

12.6.7.6 Increase LPSW flow by establishing -5000 GPM through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

* For 2A LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 GPM.

-/ _* For 2B LPI Cooler, place 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 GPM.

12.6.7.7 Increase LPSW flow by establishing ;5000 GPM through both the 3A and 3B LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve s5000 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, place 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) in MANUAL and throttle to achieve ;5000 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow > 9000 GPM, start the second Unit 3 LPSW pump.

12.6.7.8 Start OR verify running 1 A OR 1 B LPI pump on Unit 1.

/ * 1A LPI PUMP

_/ * 1B LPI PUMP

12.6.7.9 Start OR verify running 2A OR 2B LPI pump on Unit 2.

/_ _* 2A LPI PUMP

Page 70: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 70 of 202

/ - * 2B LPI PUMP 12.6.7.10 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps

on Unit 1.

/ * 1A CC PUMP

/ * 1B CC PUMP

12.6.7.11 Start OR verify running both Component Cooling pumps on Unit 2.

/ * 2A CC PUMP

/ * 2B CC PUMP

12.6.7.12 Start or verify running 2 of the 3 LPSW pumps for the shared Units 1 and 2 LPSW System.

12.6.7.13 OPEN or verify OPEN the following PCB's:

/ _* PCB-1 7

/ * PCB-26

/. * PCB-28

12.6.7.14 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 1.

* 1A MD EFDWP

/ * 1B MD EFDWP

12.6.7.15 Start the MD EFDW pumps on Unit 2.

* 2A MD EFDWP

/ _* 2B MD EFDWP

12.6.7.16 Start the 1A OR 1B HPI pump on Unit 1.

/ __* Place 1 A HPI PUMP TO ON

_/ * Place 1 B HPI PUMP TO ON

12.6.7.17 Start thee 2A OR 2B HPI pump on Unit 2.

/_ *. Place 2A HPI PUMP TO ON

/. * Place 2B HPI PUMP TO ON

Page 71: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 71 of 202

NOTE: Step 12.6.8.1 will cause a loss of power on all three Units. Unit 3 will have an Engineered Safeguards actuation of channels 1 through 8.

12.6.8 Using the countdown method discussed in the pre-job briefing perform the following steps:

12.6.9 Simultaneously, perform the following:

* Open PCB-1 8

* Open PCB-27

SOpen PCB-30

* Actuate ES Channels 1 and 2 ON UNIT 3

__12.6.9.1 Within 5 Seconds of actuating ES Channels 1 and 2 on Unit 3, actuate ES Channels 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

12.6.10 Re-energize the Startup Transformers from the 230 KV Switchyard approximately 40 Seconds after de-energizing them in step 12.6.8.1.

- * Synchronize and Close PCB-1 8.

-- * Synchronize and Close PCB-27.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-30.

------ * Synchronize and Close PCB-1 7.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-28.

* Synchronize and Close PCB-26.

12.6.11 Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

12.6.12 Unit 2 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2).

12.6.13 Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3).

12.6.14 Start additional loads per the following Enclosure as requested by the Test Coordinator:

* 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

* 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2).

Page 72: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 72 of 202

NOTE: The following steps may be used regardless of whether the Oconee Units are being powered from the Keowee Underground or a Lee CT.

12.6.15 Transfer Units 1 2 and 3 back to the startup transformers by performing the 'following:

UNIT 1:

12.6.16 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* A RBCU

* 1B RBCU

. 1 C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.6.15.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. Any Keowee Unit receiving power from CX will momentarily loss power.

12.6.16.1 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.16.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/. * S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

/ * S2 1 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

12.6.16.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/. _* El 1 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E2, MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.6.16.4 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 73: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 73 of 202

12.6.16.5 Have Unit 1 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

UNIT 2:

12.6.17 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

2A RBCU

* 2B RBCU

* 2C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.6.16.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 2. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel. The SSF will lose power during this transfer.

12.6.17.1 Place the following Unit 2 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.17.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/ * S12 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

/ _* S22 STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

12.6.17.3 After 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/ * E12 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ _* E22 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.6.17.4 Place the following Unit 2 transfer switches to AUTO:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ _* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.17.5 Have Unit 2 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2).

Page 74: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 74 of 202

UNIT 3: 12.6.18 Stop all operating RBCU's by placing switch to OFF:

* A RBCU

* B RBCU

* C RBCU

* Time

NOTE: Step 12.6.17.2 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

12.6.18.1 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/-- * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ -* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.18.2 Simultaneously OPEN the following BKR's

/ * S13 STANDBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

/-- * S23 STANDBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

12.6.18.3 After. 3 seconds CLOSE the following BKR's:

/-- _ El3 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E23 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

12.6.18.4 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.18.5 Have Unit 3 Control Room to begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3).

12.6.19 Shutdown the Keowee Units as follows:

Page 75: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 75 of 202

12.6.19.1 On UNIT 3 RZ MODULES, verify OR place the following RZ Modules to MANUAL:

* KEOWEE START CHANNEL A

* KEOWEE START CHANNEL B

STBY BUS FDR BKR 1

/ * STBY BUS FDR BKR 2

/ * LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 1

* LOAD SHED & STBY BKR 2

12.6.19.2 In the Unit 3 Control Room, depress the following to reset the Keowee emergency start signal from Unit 3 (3UB1).

* KEOWEE ES CHANNEL A

* KEOWEE ES CHANNEL B

12.6.19.3 Place the following transfer switches to MANUAL (2AB3).

/ * CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

12.6.19.4Open or verify open the following BKR's:

* SK1 CT-4 STBY BUS 1 FEEDER

/ _* SK2 CT-4 STBY BUS 2 FEEDER

NOTE: Resetting the Keowee Emergency Start Signal will cause both Keowee Units to Automatically shutdown since they were connected to the grid when the Emergency Start Signal was received.

12.6.19.5 Reset the Keowee Emergency Start signal from Unit 1 and Unit 2 Control Room.

-/- * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

- / - * Unit 1 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

__/-* Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 1

- / * Unit 2 KEOWEE LOGIC RESET CH 2

Page 76: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 76 of 202

12.6.19.6 Have Keowee Operations verify both Keowee Units are shutdown.

12.6.19.7 Place the following transfer switches to AUTO (2AB3).

/.* CT-4 BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

/. *. CT-4 BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

---/ 12.6.20 Reset ES Digital Channels 1 through 8 IN THE UNIT 3 Control Room.

12.6.21 The Test Coordinator shall conduct a post-test briefing with Operating crew, Engineering, and Management Designee to discuss:

* Data Acquisition Results

* Test Acceptance Criteria

* Lessons learned

* Necessity for procedure changes prior to continuing

* Equipment repairs

* Other concerns.

12.6.22 Position the switchable jumpers for the 3A and 3B SF Cooling Pumps to OFF:

12.6.22.1 Switchable jumper SFCP-3A in MCC 3XL-2C

.. 12.6.22.2 Switchable jumper SFCP-3B in MCC 3XN-3C

12.6.23 Close the following Knife Switches on the normal/startup sync relay and remove Blue Tags:

- *- Knife switch 10 on relay 25111 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 1 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B1 2 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 2 * Blue Tag removed

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B13 * Blue Tag removed

Page 77: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 77 of 202

/ * Knife switch 10 on relay 25B2 3 * Blue Tag removed

---- 12.7 Remove White Tag from 1CCW 1-6 (WATER BOX EMER DISCH) switches:

12.7.1 When at least 1 Unit 1 CCW pump is operating, place 1CCW 16 (WATER BOX EMER DISCH) switch to the AS FOUND position recorded in step 8.7.4:--

--- 12.8 Shutdown the Lee CT per OP/0/A/1 107/003 (100KV Power Supply).

12.9 When at least 1 Unit 2 CCW pump is operating, return 2CCW-7 (WATER BOX EMERGENCY DISCHARGE) to AS FOUND position by performing following steps:

12.9.1 Remove White tag on 2CCW-7.

12.9.2 Place 2CCW-7 (WATER BOX EMERGENCY DISCHARGE) to the AS FOUND position recorded in step 8.12.1

12.10 Return 3CCW-93 (WATER BOX EMERGENCY DISCHARGE) to the AS FOUND position by performing the following steps: .-- 12.10.1 Remove White tag on 3 CCW-93.

12.10.2 Place 3CCW-93 (WATER BOX EMERGENCY DISCHARGE) to the AS FOUND position recorded in step 8.1 2.7

12.11 Restore SSF BKR OTS1-1 Control Circuitry to NORMAL:

12.11.1 Remove Blue Tag and position Breaker #4 in DC Panelboard 1 DIA to "ON".

-- 12.11.2 Remove Blue Tag and position Breaker #4 in DC Panelboard 2DIA to "ON".

.. 12.11.3 Remove Blue Tag and position Breaker #9 in DC Panelboard 3DIA to "ON".

12.12 Remove the Switchable Jumpers in the 3A and 38 SF Cooling Pump breaker compartments:

12.12.1 Stop the 3A SF COOLING PUMP.

12.12.2 Red tag open 3A SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XL-2C).

12.12.3 Remove switchable jumper (labeled SFCP-3A) in MCC 3XL, compartment 2C, between terminals 12 and 13. (0-

Page 78: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 78 of 202

2752-A29, OEE-25-3).

12.12.4 Remove red ta and close 3A SF Cooling Pump breaker(3XL-2C

12.12.5 Start the 3A SF COOLING PUMP.

12.12.6 Stop the 3B SF COOLING PUMP.

12.12.7 Red tag open 3B SF Cooling Pump breaker (3XN-3C).

12.12.8 Remove switchable jumper (labeled SFCP-3B) in MCC 3XN, compartment 3C, between terminals 12 and 13. (O-2752-A36, OEE-25-3).

12.12.9 Remove red tag and close 3B SF Cooling Pump breaker(3XN-3C).

12.12.10 Start the 3S SF COOLING PUMP.

12.13 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 1 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

/ _* For 1 A LPI Cooler, throttle close 1 LPSW-251 (1 A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve ft0 GPM.

/-I_*o For 1 B LPI Cooler, throttle close 1 LPSW-252 (1 B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve sws0 GPM.

12.14 Decrease LPSW flow through the UNIT 2 LPI Cooler that is NOT in service:

-- /___*o For 2A LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-251 (2A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve ft0 gpm.

/ * For 2B LPI Cooler, throttle close 2LPSW-252 (2B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve f0 gpm.

12.15 Decrease LPSW flow through the Unit 3 LPI Coolers:

* For 3A LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-405 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve s0 gpm.

* For 3B LPI Cooler, throttle close 3LPSW-404 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET CONTROL) to achieve =0 gpm.

* When total LPI Cooler and RBCU LPSW flow < 9000 GPM, stop one of the two operating Unit 3 LPSW pumps.

-- 12.16 Have Operation Begin the following Enclosures to realign the Oconee Units in their normal alignment:

Page 79: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 79 of 202

Enclosure 13.14 (Unit 1 Post Test Alignment)

Enclosure 13.15 (Unit 2 Post Test Alignment)

Enclosure 13.16 (Unit 3 Post Test Alignment)

__12.17 Verify section 10.2 of TT/0/A/0610/25A is complete.

12.18 Forward all collected data to appropriate accountable engineer.

Page 80: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 80 of 202 . 13.0 List of Enclosures

13.1 Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

13.2 Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

13.3 Unit 3 Pre-Test Alignment

13.4 Unit 3 Pre-Test 4160 Switchgear Checklist and 600V Load Center Checklist

13.5 Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment

13.6 Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

13.7 Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

13.8 Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3

13.8A Restoring Unit 3 Loads Outside The Control Room

13.9 Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

13.10 Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

13.11 Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3

13.12 Contingency Actions for Power Restoration 13.13 Unit 3 Post ES Actuation Alignment

13.14 Unit 1 Post Test Alignment

13.15 Unit 2 Post Test Alignment

13.16 Unit 3 Post Test Alignment

Page 81: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 81 of 202

Enclosure 13.1 Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

NOTE: Steps 1.0 through 16.0 may be performed in any sequence.

1.0 RCS filled with a nitrogen or steam bubble in the pressurizer.

2.0 Align the HPI pumps to recirculate to the Letdown Storage Tank as fo0nows:

2.1 HPI system aligned per HPI Makeup and Demineralizer Valve Checklist and HPI Fill Seal Injection and Seal Return Valve Checklist of OP/1 /A/i 104/0 (High Pressure Injection System)

-- 2.2Verify Level in the LDST > 60 inches.

2.3Hydrogen over pressure established within the Normal Operating Envelope of Enclosure "Letdown Storage Tank Pressure VS Indicated Level" of OP/1/A/1104/02 (High Pressure Injection)

2.4 Secure makeup flowpath to LPI from the BHUT (Bleed Hold-Up Tank):

/_2.4.0.1 Close 1 HP-363 (Letdown Line to LP Pump Suction Block) (LPI Hatch Area).

/--2.4.0.2 Open 1HP-78 (LDST Inlet Stop Check)(Room 213Top of LDST).

2.4.0.3 Remove log entry from shift Turnover Sheet that the makeup flowpath through 1 HP-363 (Letdown Line to LP Pump Suction Block) is available.

2.5 Close or verify closed the discharge valves for the 1 A and 1 B HPI pumps:

* 1HP-106 (HPI Pump 1A Discharge)(2' E of 1A HPIP, 10' up)

* 1HP-110 (HPI Pump 1 B Discharge)(2' E of 1 B HPIP, 9' up)

2.6 Ensure HPI pump recirculation valves are open:

HPI Pump 1A

* 1HP-247 (HPI Pump 1A Recirc. Block)(3' E of 1A HPIP)

* 1HP-248 (HPI Pump 1A Recirc. Stop Check)(2' E of 1B HPIP)

HPI Pump I B

* iHP-249 (HPI Pump 1B Recirc. Block)(2' E of IB HPIP, 5' up)

* 1HP-250 (HPI Pump 1 B Recirc. Stop Check)(5' NE of 1 B HPIP, 7' up)

Page 82: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 82 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

2.7 Vent the 1A and 11B HPI pumps per PT/1/A/0202/13 (High Pressure Injection Pump Venting).

* 1A HPI pump

* 1B HPI pump

2.8Verify LPSW flow through 1A and 1B HPI pump motor coolers > 1.0 gpm each.

-__2.9Ensure proper upper and lower oil levels on 1A and 1B HPI pump motors.

NOTE: Technical Specification 3.1.2.9 requires LTOP requirements to be met when Tc < 3250F and the Reactor Vessel Head is installed.

2.10 Review the in progress LTOP procedure OP/1 /A/1 104/49 (Low Temperature Over pressure Protection) and verify LTOP requirements WILL BE met with an HPI Pump ON.

2.10.1 Verify the following indications are noted in Control Room:

* 1HP-26 (1A HP INJECTION) position indication lights are both OFF.

* 1 HP-27 (1 B HP INJECTION) position indication lights are both OFF.

* 1HP-409 (1HP-27 BYPASS) switch White Tagged closed.

* 1HP-410 (1HP-26 BYPASS) switch White Tagged closed.

Unit Supervisor

-- 2.11 Verify HPI Pump switches in OFF position.

2.12 Rack in the HPI Pump breakers:

/ * 1A HPI Pump (1TC-9)

* 1B HPI Pump (1TE-9)

.3.0 Align LPI system in the normal decay heat removal mode with flow through 1 LPI train only with 1A LPI Pump operating per OP/1/A/1104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

Page 83: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 83 of 202

*__3.11 F LPI flow is aligned through a purification or deborating demineralizer then remove the LPI from purification per OP/1 /A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

Page 84: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 84 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

NOTE: Both MD EFDWP's must be operated to setup the desired pretest conditions. The steps performed in section 4.0 are similar to those used in PT/1/A/0600/14 (Emergency Feedwater Pump Suction From Hotwell Test) and therefore it is recommended that an operations performance technician assist with the flow setup.

4.0 Align both of the MD EFDWPs to recirculate to the UST by performing the following:

-4.1 Verify Upper Surge Tank (UST) level > 7 feet.

4.2 Verify the following:

* Emergency Feedwater System aligned per OP/1/A/1106/06, Emergency Feedwater System Valve Checklist.

* Condensate S stem aligned per OP/1 /A/1 106/02, Condensate Kecirc Checklist QR Feedwater Cleanup Checklist.

* The 0-100 psid Rosemount AP Transmitter is installed to measure MDEFWP recirculation flow per TT/0/A/0610/25A (Test Equipment Setup For Data Acquisition for Emergency Power and Engineered Safeguards Functional Test).

4.3 CLOSE OR Verify CLOSED the following valves:

_* 1 FDW-372 (1 A MD EFDWP DISCH BLOCK)

_* 1 FDW-382 (1 B MD EFDWP DISCH BLOCK)

NOTE: 1 FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 1 A Vent) and 1 FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 2B Vent) are on capped lines. It will be necessary to take a pipe wrench to remove and reinstall these during venting.

4.4 Vent the MDEFDWPs until air-free water is observed:

Open:

* FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 1A Vent)(TB-1-E/F24, 5'UP)

* 1 FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 1 B Vent)(TB-1 -E/F24, 5'UP)

Close:

* FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 1A Vent)(TB-1-E/F24, 5' UP)

* 1FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 1B Vent)(TB-1-E/F24, 6' UP)

Page 85: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 85 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

4.5 Verify pump and motor lube oil levels are satisfactory:

* 1 A MDEFDW Pump

* 1 B MDEFDW Pump

4.6 Verify k 14.5 psig suction pressure:

* 1A MDEFDW Pump

* 1B MDEFDW Pump

4.7 Unlock and OPEN:

* 1 FDW-352 (1 A MDEFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E-24)

* 1 FDW-354 (1 B MDEFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E-24)

4.8 Valve IN 1 PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

4.8.1 OPEN or verify OPEN Low Side isolation valve.

4.8.2 CLOSE or verify CLOSED Equalization valve.

.4.8.3 OPEN or verify OPEN High Side isolation valve.

4.9 Valve out 1PG-519 (0-200 gpm) as follows:

4.9.1 CLOSE or verify CLOSED High Side isolation valve.

-4.9.2 OPEN or verify OPEN Equalization valve.

4.9.3 Close or verify closed Low Side isolation valve.

NOTE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 1A MDEFDW Pump is running.

4.10 Start 1A MD EFDW PUMP.

CAUTION: 1 PG-843 response time is slow. Do NOT exceed 500 gpm.

--- 4.11 Throttle 1 FDW-353 (1 A MDEFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E-24) to 450 - 475 gpm on 1 PG-843 and record:_ gpm

Page 86: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 86 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

4.12 Valve out 1 PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

... 4.12.1 CLOSE or Verify CLOSED High Side isolation valve.

4.12.2 OPEN or Verify OPEN Equalization valve.

4.12.3 CLOSE or Verify CLOSED Low Side isolation valve.

NOTE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 1 B MDEFDW Pump is running.

__..4.13 Start 1B MD EFDW PUMP.

NOTE: Flow AP Transmitter is not linear, Flow = 105.22 \AP.

4.14 Throttle 1 FDW-355 (1 B MDEFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E-24) to 78 psid (- 925 gpm) on test AP Transmitter and record:

* Flow (1 A & 1 B Pump Flow) _--__ psid

* 1 A MDEFWP Suction Pressure -- psig

* 1 B MDEFWP Suction Pressure --------- psig

04.15 Stop 1A MDEFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to OFF. 4.16 Stop 1 B MDEFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to OFF.

5.0 CC system aligned per Component Cooling System Startup enclosure of OP/1 /A/1 104/08 (Component Cooling System).

__6.0 CCW system in service with at least three CCW pumps operating.

-6.1 Collect Amertap balls per Amertap System Shutdown enclosure of OP/1/A/1104/12 (Condenser Circulating Water System).

6.2 To verify CCW Inlet pipes full, perform EITHER Step 6.2.1 or 6.2.2:

6.2.1 Verif the following relay lights ON: (Cable Room, Cabinet 1 M C1

* 1A & 1B CCWP DISC HI PT

C* 1C& 1D CCWP DISC HI PT

Page 87: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 87 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

6.2.2 To Vent the CCW headers until all air is purged:

6.2.2.1 Manually throttle open the following valves: (CCW Intake Structure)

* 1CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr 1A High Point Vent)

* 1 CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr 1 B High Point Vent)

6.2.2.2 When lines are vented, manually close:

* 1CCW-26 * 1CCW-28

7.0 Align the electrical system as follows:

* Auxiliaries powered from CT-1 transformer.

* Unit 1 Main Transformer and Auxiliary Transformer back charged per OP/0/A/1107/05 (Backcharging Unit Mains and Auxiliary T ransformers).

* Verify the following Unit 1 transfer switches are positioned as follows:

__* MFB 1 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

* MFB 2 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

8.0 Verify OR lower level in both S/G level(s) to s90% on the Operating Range level indicators, per OP/1 /A/1 106/08 (SG Secondary Hot Soak, Fill, Drain and Layup).

9.0 Verify QR place 2 RBCU's in service in HIGH speed.

NOTE: One of the LPSW pumps must be powered from Unit 1.

10.0 Establish required test flow on the Units 1&2 LPSW System:

10.1 Throttle the following valves to establish f1 500 gpm LPSW flow through each UNIT 1 RBCU outlet:

* 1LPSW-18 (1A RBCU OUTLET)

* 1LPSW-21 (1B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 1LPSW-24 (1C RBCU OUTLET)

Page 88: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 88 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

10.2 Throttle the following valves to establish -1500 gpm LPSW flow through each UNIT 2 RBCU outlet:

* 2LPSW-1 8 (2A RBCU OUTLET)

* 2LPSW-21 (2B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 2LPSW-24 (2C RBCU OUTLET)

10.3 Place the Unit 1 and Unit 2 MTOT temperature controllers in HAND and throttle open to increase LPSW Nonessential flow to s7000 gpm as read on OLPSPG1010 (Location: TBB / J-24).

* 1 LPSW-51 (MTOT COOLER TEMP CONTROLLER)

* 2LPSW-51 (MTOT COOLER TEMP CONTROLLER)

* When the total Unit 1 and Unit 2 RBCU, LPI Cooler, AND nonessential LPSW flow > 12,000 gpm, start a second LPSW pump.

10.4 Record Unit 1 &2 Nonessential LPSW flow:

* OLPSPG1010 GPM

11.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X1 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 E-27)

* MCC 1 XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 1 XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 1XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1 XF TRANSFER SWITCH

12.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X2 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 F-27)

/ * MCC 1XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1 XC TRANSFER SWITCH

/__* MCC 1 XD TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1 XB TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1 XE TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 89: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 89 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

13.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X3 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 G-27)

/. _* 480V SUPPLY FDR BKR TURB BLDG EXH FANS 1 E THROUGH 11 TRANSFER SWITCH

/.* MCC 1 XF TRANSFER SWITCH

/. * MCC 1 XE TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1 XD TRANSFER SWITCH

14.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X4 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 G-26)

----- MCC 1XC TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1 XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

/.* MCC 1 XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

15.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X5 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 J-27)

_* MCC 1 XO TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1XI TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 1 XT TRANSFER SWITCH

/1* MCC 1 XH TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1XL TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 1XK TRANSFER SWITCH

16.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1 X6 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 K-27)

* MCC 1XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 1 XK TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1XN TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1 XI TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1XR TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 1 XL TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 90: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 90 of 202

/ - _* MCC 1 XP TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 91: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 91 of 202

Enclosure 13.1

Unit 1 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

17.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 1X7 switches to MANUAL: (TB/3 L-27)

/- -* MCC 1XH TRANSFER SWITCH

/.* MCC 1 XT TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 1XO TRANSFER SWITCH

/. * MCC 1 XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

/.* MCC 1XN TRANSFER SWITCH

/-* MCC 1 XP TRANSFER SWITCH

/- -* MCC 1XR TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 92: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 92 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

NOTE: Steps 1.0 through 15.0 may be performed in any sequence.

1.0 RCS filled with a Nitrogen or steam bubble in the pressurizer.

2.0 Align the HPI pumps to recirculate to the Letdown Storage Tank as foi ows:

___-2.1 Verify HPI system aligned per HPI Makeup and Demineralizer Valve Checklist and HPI Fill Seal Injection and Seal Return Valve Checklist of OP/2/A/1 1,04/02 (High Pressure Injection System)

.. 2.2 Verify Level in the LDST is > 60 inches.

2.3Hydrogen over pressure established within the Normal Operating Envelope of Enclosure "Letdown Storage Tank Pressure VS Indicated Level" of OP/2/A/1 104/02 (High Pressure Injection)

2.4 Secure makeup flowpath to LPI from the BHUT (Bleed Hold-Up Tank):

/ a. Close 2HP-363 (Letdown Line to LPI Pump Suction

*0 Block) (Room 63-South LPI Pump Room).

b. Open 2HP-78 (LDST Inlet Stop Check)(Room 215-Top of LDST).

c. Remove log entry from shift Turnover Sheet that the makeup flowpath through 2HP-363 (Letdown Line to LPI Pump Suction Block) is available.

2.5 Close or verify closed the discharge valves for the 2A and 2B HPI pumps:

* 2HP-106 (HPI Pump 2A Discharge)(2' E of 2A HPIP, 10'up)

* 2HP-1 10 (HPI Pump 2B Discharge)(2' E of 2B HPIP, 9'up)

2.6 Ensure HPI pump recirculation valves are open:

HPI Pump 2A

* 2HP-247 (HPI Pump 2A Recirc. Block)(2' E of 2A HPIP, 4'up)

* 2HP-248 (HPI Pump 2A Recirc. Stop Check)(4' E of 2A HPIP, 9'up)

HPI Pump 2B

* 2HP-249 (HPI Pump 2B Recirc. Block)(1' E of 2B HPIP, 4'up)

Page 93: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 93 of 202

* 2HP-250 (HPI Pump 2B Recirc. Stop Check)(4' E of 2B HPIP, 5'up)

Page 94: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 94 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

2.7 Vent the 2A and 2B HPI pumps per PT/2/A/0202/13 (High Pressure Injection Pump Venting).

* 2A HPI pump

* 2B HPI pump

2.8Verify LPSW flow through 2A and 2B HPI pump motor coolers > 1.0 gpm each.

__ 2.9Ensure proper upper and lower oil levels on 2A and 2B HPI pump motors.

NOTE: Technical Specification 3.1.2.9 requires LTOP requirements to be met when Tc < 325,F and the Reactor Vessel Head is installed.

2.10 Review the in progress LTOP procedure OP/2/A/1 104/49 (Low Temperature Over pressure Protection) and verify LTOP requirements WILL BE met with an HPI Pump ON.

2.10.1 Verify the following indications are noted in Control Room:

* 2HP-26 (2A HP INJECTION) position indication lights are both OFF.

* 2HP-27 (2B HP INJECTION) position indication lights are both OFF.

* 2HP-409 (2HP-27 BYPASS) switch White Tagged CLOSED.

* 2HP-410 (2HP-26 BYPASS) switch White Tagged CLOSED.

Unit Supervisor

2.11 Verify HPI Pump switches in OFF position.

2.12 Rack in the HPI Pump breakers:

/ * 2A HPI Pump (2TC-8)

/-* 2B HPI Pump (2TE-9)

--- 3.0 LPI system operating in the normal decay heat removal mode with flow through 1 LPI train only with 2A LPI Pump operating per OP/2/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

Page 95: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 95 of 202

__3.1 IF LPI flow is aligned through a purification or deborating demineralizer then remove the LPI from purification per OP/2/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

Page 96: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 96 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

NOTE: Both MD EFDWP's must be operated to setup the desired pretest conditions. The steps performed in section 4.0 are similar to those used in PT/2/A/0600/1 4 (Emergency Feedwater Pump Suction From Hotwell Test) and therefore it is recommended that an operations performance technician assist with the flow setup.

4.0 Align both of the MD EFDWP's to recirculate to the UST by performing the following:

_-4.1 Verify Upper Surge Tank (UST) level > 7 feet.

4.2 Verify the following:

* Emergency Feedwater System aligned per OP/2/A/1106/06, Emergency Feedwater System Valve Checklist.

* Condensate System aligned per OP/2/A/1 106/02, Condensate Recirc Checklist OR Feedwater Cleanup Checklist.

* The 0-100 psid Rosemount AP Transmitter is installed to measure MDEFWP recirculation flow per TT/0/A/0610/25A (Data Acquisition for Integrated Engineered Safeguards System Functional Test).

NOTE: 2FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 2A Vent) and 2FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 2B Vent) are on capped lines. It will be necessary to take a pipe wrench to remove and reinstall these during venting.

4.3 Close or verify closed the following valves:

_* 2FDW-372 (2A MD EFDWP DISCH BLOCK)

/ * 2FDW-382 (2B MD EFDWP DISCH BLOCK)

4.4 Vent the MDEFDWPs until air-free water is observed:

OPEN:

* 2FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 2A Vent)(TB-1-E/F31, 5'UP)

* 2FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 2B Vent)(TB-1-E/F31, 5'UP)

CLOSE:

* 2FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 2A Vent)(TB-1-E/F31, 5'UP)

* 2FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 2B Vent)(TB-1-E/F31, 5'UP)

Page 97: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 97 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

4.5 Verify pump and motor lube oil levels are satisfactory:

* 2A MD EFDW Pump

* 2B MD EFDW Pump

4.6 Verify _ 14.5 psig suction pressure:

* 2A MD EFDW Pump

* 2B MD EFDW Pump

4.7 Unlock and OPEN:

* 2FDW-352 (2A MD EFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E-31)

* 2FDW-354 (2B MD EFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E-31)

4.8 Valve in 2PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

4.8.1 Open or verify open Low Side isolation valve.

4.8.2 Close or verify closed Equalization valve.

--- 4.8.3 Open or verify open High Side isolation valve.

4.9 Valve out 2PG-519 (0-200 gpm) as follows:

.4.9.1 Close or verify closed High Side isolation valve.

-- 4.9.2 Open o verify open Equalization valve.

4.9.3 Close o verify closed Low Side isolation valve.

NOTE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 2A MD EFDW Pump is running.

4.10 Start 2A MD EFDW PUMP.

CAUTION: 2PG-843 response time is slow. Do NOT exceed 500 gpm.

4.11 Throttle 2FDW-353 (2A MD EFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E31) to 450 - 475 gpm on 2PG-843 and record:

* ___gpm

Page 98: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 98 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

4.12 Valve out 2PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

4.12.1 Close or verify closed High Side isolation valve.

4.12.2 Open or verify open Equalization valve.

4.12.3 Close or verify closed Low Side isolation valve.

NOTE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 2B MDEFDW Pump is running.

.- 4.13 Start 2B MD EFDW PUMP.

NOTE: Flow AP Transmitter is not linear, Flow = 105.22 VAP.

-- _4.14 Throttle 2FDW-355 (2B MD EFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E31) to 78 psid (- 925 gpm) on test AP Transmitter and record the following:

* Flow (2A & 2B Pump Flow) ------ psid

* 2A MD EFWP Suction Pressure psig

* 2B MD EFWP Suction Pressure ------------ psig

4.15 Stop 2A MD EFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to OFF.

4.16 Stop 2B MD EFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to OFF.

-5.0 CC system aligned per OP/2/A/1 104/08 (Component Cooling System)

6.0 CCW system in service with at least Three- CCW pump operating.

-- 6.1 Collect Amertap ball per OP/2/A/1 104/12 (Condenser Circulating Water System.

6.2 To verify CCW Inlet pipes full, perform EITHER Step 6.2.1 OR 6.2.2:

6.2.1 Verify the following relay lights ON: (Cable Room, Cabinet 2MTC1)

* 2A & 2B CCWP DISC HI PT

* 2C & 2D CCWP DISC HI PT

Page 99: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 99 of 202

* Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

6.2.2 To Vent the CCW headers until all air is purged

a. Manually throttle open the following valves: (CCW Intake Structure)

* 2CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2A High Point Vent)

* 2CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2B High Point Vent)

b. When lines are vented, manually close:

* 2CCW-26 _ 2CCW-28

7.0 Align the electrical system as follows:

* Auxiliaries powered from CT-2 transformer.

* Unit 2 Main Transformer and Auxiliary Transformer back charged per OP/0/A/1107/05 (Back charging Unit Mains and Auxiliary Transformers).

Verify the following Unit 2 transfer switches are positioned as follows:

* MFB 1 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

* MFB 2 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

____ .8.0 Verify OR Lower level on both S/G level(s) to sz90% on the Operating Range level indicators, per OP/ 2/A/ 1106/08 (SG Secondary Hot Soak, Fill, Drain and Layup).

9.0 Verify OR place 2 RBCU's in service in HIGH speed.

10.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X1 switches to MANUAL:

/-_* MCC 2XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/__* MCC 2XB TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 2XE TRANSFER SWITCH

/-_* MCC 2XF TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 100: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 100 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

11.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X2 switches to MANUAL:

/ * MCC 2XB TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 2XD TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 2XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ - * MCC 2XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 2XC TRANSFER SWITCH

/..* MCC 2XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

12.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X3 switches to MANUAL:

/* MCC 2XE TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 2XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 2XD TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 2XF TRANSFER SWITCH

/ - * MCC 2XC TRANSFER SWITCH

/--* MCC 2XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

13.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X4 switches to MANUAL:

_* MCC 2XH TRANSFER SWITCH

/__* MCC 2XR TRANSFER SWITCH

/--* MCC 2XI TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 2XL TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 2XK TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 2XP TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 101: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 101 of 202

Enclosure 13.2

Unit 2 Pre-Test Alignment and 600V Load Center Checklist

14.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X5 switches to MANUAL:

/ _* MCC 2XI TRANSFER SWITCH

J--* MCC 2XO TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 2XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 2XR TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 2XL TRANSFER SWITCH

/---- -.. * BATTERY DISCHARGE RATE TESTER TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 2XN TRANSFER SWITCH

15.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 2X6 switches to MANUAL:

* MCC 2XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

/-- * MCC 2XP TRANSFER SWITCH

/ -- _* MCC 2XH TRANSFER SWITCH

/____9 MCC 2XK TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 2XN TRANSFER SWITCH

/* MCC 2XO TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 102: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 102 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

NOTE: Steps 1.0 - 10.0 may be performed in any order with the exception that 4.0 must be completed prior to 5.0.

1.0 Fuel transfer canal filled to approximately 2 feet per Filling Fuel Transfer Canal enclosure of OP/3/A/1102/15 (Filling and Draining Fuel Transfer Canal).

2.0 Verify OR Establish the following BWST conditions:

* Verify Boron concentration > 2250 ppm.

* Verify Level > 40 feet.

* Verify Temperature > 55OF

3.0 Align the High Pressure Injection System:

3.1 Complete the following enclosures of OP/3/A/1104/02:

* HPI Makeup and Demineralizer Valve Checklist

* HPI Fill, Seal Injection, and Seal Return Valve Checklist

3.2Verify LDST level > 60 inches.

-- 3.3LDST pressurized with Hydrogen within the limits of Letdown Storage Tank Pressure VS Indicated Level enclosure of OP/3/A/I 104/02 (High Pressure Injection).

--/ 3.3.1 Close 3HP-128 (RCP Seal Supply Isolation)(N.E. of 3B HPI Pump)

/ 3.3.2 Open 3HP-78 (LDST Inlet Stop Check) (Top of LDST)

/ -3.3.3 Close 3HP-363 (Letdown Line to LPI Pump Suction Block)(E Wall of HPI Hatch)

3.4 Ensure 3A and 3B HPI pump recirculation valves are open:

HPI Pump 3A

* 3HP-247 (HPI Pump 3A Recirc. Block)(4' E of 3A HPIP)

* 3HP-248 (HPI Pump 3A Recirc. Stop Check)(1' E of 3B HPIP)

HPI Pump 3B

* 3HP-249 (HPI Pump 3B Recirc. Block)(4' E of 3B HPIP)

* 3HP-250 (HPI Pump 3B Recirc. Stop Check)(3' NE of 3C HPIP)

Page 103: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 103 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

3.5 Clear the white tags and close in the following valve breakers:

* 3HP-26 (3A HP INJECTION) (3XS1)

* 3HP-27 (3B HP INJECTION) (3XS2)

3.6Verify or Place 3HP-1 20 (RC VOLUME CONTROL) in MANUAL and closed.

3.7 Close or verify Closed the following:

* 3HP-26 (3A HP INJECTION)

* 3HP-27 (3B HP INJECTION)

* 3HP-409 (HP-27 BYPASS)

* 3HP-410 (HP-26 BYPASS)

3.8 Verify the following HPI Pump switches are in the "OFF" Position:

* 3A HPI PUMP

* 3B HPI PUMP

3.9Vent HPI pumps as follows:

Open or verify open the following valves until air free water issues, then close valve.

3A HPI Pump

* 3LWD-380 (HPI Pump 3A Casing Vent) (N side of 3A HPIP).

* 3LWD-383 (HPI Pump 3A Vent Block) (N side of 3A HPIP).

3B HPI Pump

* 3LWD-381 (HPI Pump 3B Casing Vent)(N side of 3B HPIP).

- * 3LWD-384 (HPI Pump 8B Vent Block)(N side of 3B 0 HPIP).

Page 104: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 104 of 202

30 HPI PUMP

* 3LWD-382 (HPI Pump 3C Casing Vent)(N side of 3C HPIP).

* 3LWD-385 (HPI Pump 3C Vent Block)(N side of 3C HPIP).

3.10 Verify LPSW flow through 3A, 3B and 3C HPI pump motor coolers 2 1.0 gpm each.

3.11 Ensure proper upper and lower oil levels on 3A, 3B and 3C HPI pump motors.

Page 105: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 105 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

4.0 Align Low Pressure Injection system as follows:

4.1 LPI filled and restarted following defueled maintenance per OP/3/A/1104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

4.21F LPI flow is aligned through a purification or deborating demineralizer then remove the LPI from purification per OP/3/A/1104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

/ 4.2.1 Stop all operating LPI pumps.

/ -4.2.2 Close 3LP-3 (LPI HOTLEG SUCTION)

4.2.3 Close 3LP-17 (3A LP INJECTION)

-/--4.2.4 Close 3LP-18 (3B LP INJECTION)

5 Close the following valves:

* 3LP-6 (3C LPI PUMP SUCTION A HEADER)

* 3LP-7 (3C LPI PUMP SUCTION B HEADER)

/ *- 3LP-9 (3C LPI PUMP DISCHARGE TO A HEADER)

/* 3LP-1 0 (3C LPI PUMP DISCHARGE TO B HEADER)

* 3LP-1 5 (3A LPI TO HPI & RBS)

/ * 3LP-1 6 (3B LPI TO HPI & RBS)

/ * 3LP-92 (3A LPI CLR BYP CONTROLLER)

* 3LP-93 (3B LPI CLR BYP CONTROLLER)

5.1 Open the following valves:

* 3LP-5 (3A LPI PUMP SUCTION)

* 3LP-8 (3B LPI PUMP SUCTION)

* 3LP-1 2 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET)

/ * 3LP-1 4 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET)

/ * 3LP-21 (3A LPI BWST SUCTION)

* /- *o 3LP-22 (3B LPI BWST SUCTION)

Page 106: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 106 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

5.2 Install switch covers on the following valves:

* 3LP-5 (3A LPI PUMP SUCTION)

* 3LP-6 (3C LPI PUMP SUCTION (A HEADER)

* 3LP-7 (3C LPI PUMP SUCTION B HEADER)

* 3LP-8 (3B LPI PUMP SUCTION)

6.0 Align the Reactor Building Spray system:

6.1 Blank flanges installed in both Reactor Building Spray headers:

* 3A Reactor Building Spray header

* 3B Reactor Building Spray header

Maintenance Coordinator Test Coordinator

6.21Reactor Building Spray system filled and vented per Enclosure 4.17 (Block Tagout 17) of OP/3/B/1 502/08 (Block Tagout Procedure).

6.3Complete Enclosure (Valve Checklist) of OP/3/A/1 104/05 (Reactor Building Spray System).

..-- 6.4Com plete Enclosure (Valve Checklist Verification) of OP/3/A/1l104/05 (Reactor Building Spray System).

6.5 Close the following valves:

/ * BS-1 5 (3A RBS Header Drain)(RB E Side, 1st Stair Landing)

/ _* 3BS-20 (3B RBS Header Drain)(RB W Side, 1st Stair Landing)

/ 6.5.1 Verify step 4.0 of this enclosure is complete.

6.6 Remove the white tags from the following:

* 3BS-3 (3A RBS PUMP SUCTION) Handwheel

* 3BS-3 (3A RBS PUMP SUCTION) Switch

L/ 6.6.1 Open 3BS-3 (3A RBS PUMP SUCTION)

Page 107: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 107 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

6.7 Vent the 3A RBS pump as follows:

-- 6.7.1 Close 3LWD-9 (3A RBS Pump Base Drain)(S LPIP Room)

-- 6.7.2 Open 3LWD-376 (3A RBS Pump Vent)(S LPIP Room)

6.8 When a solid stream of water is observed:

-- 6.8.1 Close 3LWD-376 (3A RBS Pump Vent)(S LPIP Room)

6.8.2 Open 3LWD-9 (3A RBS Pump Base Drain)(S LPIP Room)

6.9 Remove the white tags from the following:

* 3BS-4 (3A RBS PUMP SUCTION) Handwheel

* 3BS-4 (3A RBS PUMP SUCTION) Switch

/ 6.9.1 Open 3BS-4 (3B RBS PUMP SUCTION).

6.10 Vent the 3B RBS pump as follows:

6.10.1 Close 3LWD-10 (3B RBS Pump Base Drain)(N LPIP Room)

6.10.2 Open 3LWD-377 (3B RBS Pump Vent)(N LPIP Room)

6.11 When a solid stream of water is observed:

6.11.1 Close 3LWD-377 (3B RBS Pump Vent)(N LPIP Room)

.. 6.11.2 Open 3LWD-10 (3B RBS Pump Base Drain)(N LPIP Room)

____/- 6.11.3 O en 3BS-1 3 (3A RBS Pump Test)(E Pen Rm.,8'up, 30'S and 1 'W of Door)

_____/ 6.11.4 Open 3BS-1 8 (3B RBS Pump Test)(E Pen Rm.,8'up, 20'W of Door)

/6.11.5 Open 3BS-21 (RBS Test Line to BWST Block)(E Pen Rm.,8'up, 20'W of Door)

___/ 6.11.6 Open 3LP-42 (3B LPI Header Test Line)(W Pen Rm., S of Door)

NOTE: Both MD EFDWPs must be operated to setup the desired pretest conditions. The steps performed in section 4.0 are similar to those used in PT/3/A/0600/14 (Emergency Feedwater Pump Suction From Hotwell Test) and therefore it is recommended that an operations performance technician assist with the flow setup.

Page 108: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 108 of 202

6.12 Align both of the MD EFDWP's to recirculate to the UST by pe rforming the following:

6.12.1 Verify Upper Surge Tank (UST) level > 7 feet.

0

0

Page 109: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 109 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

6.12.2 Verify the following:

* Emergency Feedwater System suction and recirc. flowpath is aligned per OP/3/A/1 106/06 (Emergency Feedwater System).

* Condensate System aligned per OP/3/A/1 106/02, Condensate Recirc Checklist

OR IF BTO 3 is still in effect, a boundary move has been completed per OP/3/B/1 502/1 OB (Block Tagout Procedure) to allow filling of the UST and running the MDEFDW pumps in recirc.

* The 0-100 psid Rosemount AP Transmitter is installed to measure MD EFDWP recirculation flow per TT/0/A/0610/25A (Data Acquisition for Integrated Engineered Safeguards System Functional Test).

NOTE: 3FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 3A Vent) and 3FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 3B Vent) are on capped lines. It will be necessary to take a pipe wrench to remove and reinstall these during venting.

6.12.3 Close or verify closed the following valves:

/ _* 3FDW-372 (3A MD EFDWP DISCHARGE BLOCK)

/ _* 3FDW-382 (3B MD EFDWP DISCHARGE BLOCK)

/ _* 3FDW-374 (3A MD EFDWP DISCH TO SG A)

/ _* 3FDW-384 (3B MD EFDWP DISCH TO SG B)

6.12.4 Vent the MDEFDWPs until air-free water is observed:

Open:

* 3FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 3A Vent)(TB-1-E/F45)

* 3FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 3B Vent)(TB-1-E/F45)

Close:

* 3FDW-391 (MDEFDWP 3A Vent)(TB-1-E/F45)

* 3FDW-392 (MDEFDWP 3B Vent)(TB-1-E/F45)

Page 110: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 110 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

6.12.5 Verify pump and motor lube oil levels are satisfactory:

* 3A MD EFDW Pump

* 3B MD EFDW Pump

6.12.6 Verify _ 14.5 psig suction pressure:

* 3A MD EFDW Pump

* 3B MD EFDW Pump

6.12.7 Unlock and open:

* 3FDW-352 (3A MDEFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E45)

* 3FDW-354 (3B MDEFDW Pump Test Block) (TB/B E45)

6.12.8 Valve in 3PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

- ----- a. Open or verify open Low Side isolation valve.

_b. Close or verify closed Equalization valve.

- ----- c. Open or verify open High Side isolation valve.

6.12.9 Valve out 3PG-519 (0-200 gpm) as follows:

-- a. Close or verify closed High Side isolation valve.

b. Open or verify open Equalization valve.

c. Close or verify closed Low Side isolation valve.

N)TE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 3A MD EFDW Pump is running.

6.12.10 Start 3A MD EFDW PUMP.

CAUTION: 3PG-843 response time is slow. Do NOT exceed 500 gpm.

6.12.11 Throttle 3FDW-353 (3A MDEFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E-45) to 450 - 475 gpm on 3PG-843 and record:

gpm

Page 111: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 111 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

6.12.12 Valve out 3PG-843 (0-600 gpm) as follows:

-a. Close or verify closed High Side isolation valve.

-b. Open or verify open Equalization valve.

c. Close or verify closed Low Side isolation valve.

NOTE: Monitor bearing temperatures while 3B MDEFDW Pump is running.

-- 6.12.13 Start 3B MD EFDW PUMP.

NOTE: Flow AP Transmitter is not linear, Flow = 105.22 -\AP.

6.12.14 Throttle 3FDW-355 (3B MDEFDW Pump Throttle) (TB/B E-45) to 78 psid (- 925 gpm) on test AP Transmitter and record:

* Flow (3A & 3B Pump Flow) ------ psid

* 3A MDEFWP Suction Pressure ------------ psig

* 3B MDEFWP Suction Pressure psig

6.12.15 Stop 3A MDEFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to OF.

- 6.12.16 Stop 3B MDEFDW Pump by placing Control Switch to

6G.13 Align the Penetration Room Ventilation in the ES standby mode per OP/0/A/1104/16(Penetration Room Ventilation System).

6.13.1 Verify or place 2 RBCU's in service in HIGH speed:

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU.

6.13.2 Throttle OPEN to pass s1 500 gpm LPSW flow through each of the following valves:

* 3LPSW-1 8 (3A RBCU OUTLET)

* 3LPSW-21 (3B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 3LPSW-24 (3C RBCU OUTLET

Page 112: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 112 of 202

Enclosure 13.3

Unit 3 Pretest Alignment

6.13.3 Open OR verify open 3LPSW-565 (RB AUX FAN COOLERS INLET)

--. 6.13.4 Close OR verify closed 3LPSW-566 (3B RBCU ISOLATION)

7.0 The Unit 3 LPSW s stem is in service per OP/3/A/1 104/10 (Low Pressure Service WAter) with one LPSW pump operating.

8.0 Align the electrical system as follows:

* Auxiliaries powered from CT-3 transformer per OP/3/A/1 107/02 (Normal Power).

* Unit 3 Main Transformer and Auxiliary Transformer backcharged per OP/0/A/1107/05 (Bach charging Unit Mains and Auxiliary T ransformers).

* Verify the following Unit 3 transfer switches are positioned as follows:

* MFB 1 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

MFB 2 AUTO/MAN to MANUAL

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN to AUTO

9.0 Cross connect the Unit 3 Vent Header to Units 1&2 Vent Header per OP/3/A/1 104/18 (Gaseous Waste Disposal System).

10.0 Verify Isolated OR Isolate the R.B. penetrations 4 and 43 (3B OTSG Blowdown and 3A OTSG Blowdown INSIDE the reactor building per OP/3/B/1502/09 (Containment Closure Control).

11.0 Remove the reactor building process radiation monitors (RIAs 47, 48, 49, and 49A) from service as follows:

-- 11.1 Contact RP to initiate compensatory sampling.

... 11.2 Stop the RIA sample pump.

11.3 Close 3PR-8 (RB RADIATION MONITOR INLET).

11.4 Close 3PR-1 0 (RB RADIATION MONITOR RETURN).

Page 113: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 113 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.4

Unit 3 PRE-TEST 4160V SWITCHGEAR & 600V LOAD CENTER CHECKLIST

1.0 Record AS FOUND status of each breaker:

* Disconnected/Open * Connected/Closed * Connected/Open * Test/Closed * Test/Open

2.0 Place breaker in designated position per OP/0/A/1 102/06 (Procedure For Removing From OR Returning To Service 6900/4160/600 Volt Breakers).

3.0 Close breaker.

1.0 2.0 3.0

As-Found Desig- Per- Verified Breaker nated formed By Closed Position By

3TC-1 BUS 1 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

3TC-2 CONNECT 3X1 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TC-3 CONNECT 3X4 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TC-8 CONNECT N/A 3A HPI PUMP

3TC-9 CONNECT N/A 3A LPI PUMP

3TC-10 CONNECT N/A 3A RBS PUMP

3TC-1 1 CONNECT N/A 3A LPSW PUMP

3TC-13 CONNECT 3X8 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TC-14 BUS 2 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

3TD-0 CONNECT N/A 3A EFDW PUMP

Page 114: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 114of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.4

PRE-TEST 4160V SWITCHGEAR & 600V LOAD CENTER CHECKLIST

1.0 2.0 3.0 As-Found Desig- Per- Verified Breaker

nated formed By Closed Position By

3TD-1 BUS 1 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

3TD-2 CONNECT 3X2 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TD-3 CONNECT 3X5 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TD-9 CONNECT N/A 3C HPI PUMP

3TD-10 CONNECT N/A 3B LPI PUMP

3TD-1 1 CONNECT N/A 3B RBS PUMP

3TD-12 CONNECT N/A 3B LPSW PUMP

3TD-1 3 CONNECT 3X9 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TD-14 BUS 2 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

3TE-0 CONNECT N/A 3B EFDW PUMP

3TE-1 BUS 1 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

3TE-2 CONNECT 3X3 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TE-9 CONNECT N/A 3B HPI PUMP

3TE-1 2 CONNECT 3X1 0 TRANSFORMER FEEDER

3TE-14 BUS 2 CONNECT INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER

Page 115: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 115 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.4

PRE-TEST 4160V SWITCHGEAR & 600V LOAD CENTER CHECKLIST

4.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X1 switches to MANUAL:

/ * MCC 3XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XB TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XE TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 3XF TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MAIN STEP-UP TRANSFORMER 480V LOAD CENTER MST TRANS. #1 TRANSFER SWITCH

/.* A SULLAIR COMPRESSOR TRANSFER SWITCH

5.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X2 switches to MANUAL:

/ * MCC 3XB TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XD TRANSFER SWITCH

MCC 3XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XA TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XC TRANSFER SWITCH

-- -/-MAIN STEP-UP TRANSFORMER 480V LOAD CENTER MST TRANS. #2 TRANSFER SWITCH

/ __* MCC 3XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

6.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X3 switches to MANUAL:

/ _* MCC 3XE TRANSFER SWITCH

/__* MCC 3XGB TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XD TRANSFER SWITCH

I * MCC 3XF TRANSFER SWITCH

S __* MCC 3XC TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* SULLAIR COMPRESSOR B SERVICE AIR

/ * MCC 3XGA TRANSFER SWITCH

*/ * 480V SUPPLY FDR BKR TURB BLDG EXH FANS 3E THROUGH 3J TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 116: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 116 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.4

PRE-TEST 4160V SWITCHGEAR & 600V LOAD CENTER CHECKLIST

7.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X4 switches to MANUAL:

/ * MCC 3XH TRANSFER SWITCH

/ 9* MCC 3XR TRANSFER SWITCH

/- * MCC 3XT TRANSFER SWITCH

/_* MCC 3XL TRANSFER SWITCH

-/_* MCC 3XL TRANSFER SWITCH

------/------MCC 3XK TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XP TRANSFER SWITCH

8.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X5 switches to MANUAL:

------ / * MCC 3XI TRANSFER SWITCH

MCC 3XO TRANSFER SWITCH

/. * MCC 3XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XR TRANSFER SWITCH

-- -/-MCC 3XL TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XN TRANSFER SWITCH

9.0 Position the following 600V Load Center 3X6 switches to MANUAL:

__* MCC 3XJ TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XP TRANSFER SWITCH

/ _* MCC 3XH TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XK TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XN TRANSFER SWITCH

/ * MCC 3XO TRANSFER SWITCH

* MCC 3XT TRANSFER SWITCH

Page 117: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 117 of 202

Enclosure 13.5

Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment

1.0 Verify Bypassed OR place the following in BYPASS.

* CHANNEL "A" HP INJ BYPASS

* CHANNEL "B" HP INJ BYPASS

* CHANNEL "C" HP INJ BYPASS

* CHANNEL "A" LP INJ BYPASS

* CHANNEL "B" LP INJ BYPASS

* CHANNEL "C" LP INJ BYPASS

2.0 Verify reset or reset as necessary all ES digital channels.

* ES Digital Channel 1 -_-* ES Digital Channel 2

* ES Digital Channel 3 * ES Digital Channel 4

* ES Digital Channel 5 -- _* ES Digital Channel 6

* ES Digital Channel 7 - _* ES Digital Channel 8

NOTE: Only one LPSW pump will be operating.

3.0 Verify positioned or position the following ES components as designated below:

3.1 ES CHANNEL 1

* HPI Pump A OFF

* HPI Pump B OFF

* 3HP-24 CLOSED

* 3HP-26 CLOSED

* 3HP-3 OPEN

* 3HP-4 OPEN

* 3HP-20 OPEN

* Load Shed and NORMAL Standby Bkr 1

* Standby Bus OPEN Feeder Bkr 1

Page 118: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 118 of 202

Enclosure 13.5

Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment (3.1 Continued)

* 3GWD-1 2 OPEN

* 3LWD-1 OPEN

* 3CS-5 OPEN

* 3PR-7 OPEN

* 3PR-9 OPEN

* 3RC-5 OPEN

* 3RC-6 OPEN

* 3FDW-105 OPEN

* 3FDW-107 OPEN

3.2 ES CHANNEL 2

* HPI Pump B OFF

HPI Pump C OFF

* HP-25 CLOSED

* HP-27 CLOSED

* Load Shed and NORMAL Standby Bkr 2

* Standby Bus OPEN Feeder Bkr 2

* 3FDW-103 OPEN

* 3FDW-104 OPEN

3.3 ES CHANNEL 3

* LPI Pump A OFF

* 3LP-17 CLOSED

* 3LP-21 OPEN

* LPSW Pump A OFF/RUN

Page 119: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 119 of 202

Enclosure 13.5

Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment

3.4 ES CHANNEL 4

* LPI Pump B OFF

* 3LP-1 8 CLOSED

* 3LP-22 OPEN

* LPSW Pump B OFF/RUN

3.5 ES CHANNEL 5

* 3CC-7 OPEN

* 3LPSW-1 5 OPEN

* 3LPSW-6 OPEN

* PR Fan A OFF

* RBCU A HIGH

-. 3LPSW-18 THROTTLED

* RBCU B OFF

* 3LPSW-21 THROTTLED

* 3LPSW-565 OPEN

* 3LPSW-566 CLOSED

3.6 ES CHANNEL 6

* 3LPSW-1 5 OPEN

* 3LPSW-6 OPEN

* PR Fan B OFF

* RBCU C HIGH

* 3LPSW-24 THROTTLED

* RBCU B OFF

* 3LPSW-21 THROTTLED

3LPSW-565 OPEN

Page 120: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 120 of 202

* 3LPSW-566 CLOSED

Page 121: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 121 of 202

Enclosure 13.5

Unit 3 ES Component Verification/Alignment

3.7 ES CHANNEL 7

* 3LP-21 OPEN

* RBS Pump A OFF

* 3BS-1 CLOSED

ES CHANNEL 8

* 3LP-22 OPEN

* RBS Pump B OFF

* 3BS-2 CLOSED

Page 122: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 122 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

1 .0 Verify the MFB's are energized.

1.1 If the MFB's are NOT energized within 1 minute of power loss, then REFER TO Enclosure 13.12 Contingency Actions for Power Restoration.

2.0 When power is restored Verify at least one LPI pump restarts to provide Decay Heat Removal.

-- 2.1 IF the previously running LPI pump fails to restart, attempt to restart it.

2.21F the previously running LPI pump will NOT start, then restart an alternate LPI pump.

* Refer to Enclosure 3.23 of OP/i /A/i 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection) to start an alternate LPI pump.

_..2.3Verify approximately 3000 GPM LPI flow to the core.

------ 2.4Verify 2 of 3 Unit 1 and 2 LPSW pumps are operating.

----- 2.51F necessary adjust LPSW flow to the 'in-service' LPI cooler(s) to maintain RCS temperature stable.

3.0 Verify the following "non-load shed" switchgear and Battery Chargers are energized by verifying that the following statalarms are EXINGUISHED:

* 1X5 1SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 1X5 POWER FAILURE

* 1X6 1SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 1X6 POWER FAILURE

* 1X7 1SA-4/A-7 EL 600V LC 1X7 POWER FAILURE

* 1X8 1SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 1X8 POWER FAILURE

._* 1X9 1SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 1X9 POWER FAILURE

. IX10 1SA-4/C-3 EL 600V LC 1X10 POWER FAILURE

1XS1 * 1XS2 1 SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MOTOR CONTRL CTR

1XS3 TROUBLE

* 1CA Control Battery Charger 1 SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 1CA TROUBLE

* 1CB Control Battery Charger 1 SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 1 CB TROUBLE

Page 123: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 123 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

4.0 Reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing RESET simultaneously on both:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

and

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

NOTE: IF any of the following hot shutdown loads did NOT restart, note discrepancy and continue with this Enclosure. Do NOT attempt to reset loads.

5.0 Verify the following hot shutdown loads restart:

* A HPI PUMP

* B HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFW PUMP

* 1B MD EFW PUMP

* 1A CC PUMP * 1B CC PUMP

NOTE: The Test Coordinator shall determine when the HPI pumps, MD EFW pumps and CC pumps should be secured. This Enclosure should be continued in the event the Test Coordinator delays shutdown of these pumps. Operations will stop ANY pump that exhibits signs of distress. (bearings, temps, vibration, noise, etc.).

5.1 When directed by the Test Coordinator, verify or place the control switches for the following pumps to the "OFF" position:

* 1A HPI PUMP

* lB HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFW PUMP

* B MD EFW PUMP

* 1A CC PUMP

* 1B CC PUMP

Page 124: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 124 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

NOTE: This Enclosure ma be stopped at this point and a dead bus transfer back to the Startup source performed per Section 12 of the test procedure. However, should the dead bus transfer be delayed or additional loading on the STBY Busses desired, then at the Test Coordinator's and OPS Shift Managers's (OSM's) discretion, this Enclosure should be continued to recover essential loads.

6.0 IF the dead bus transfer to the startup source is delayed, or at the OSM's and Test Coordinator's discretion, restore essential loads by performing the following:

6.1 Send an operator to restore the following loads by closing the breakers at the control panels listed be ow:

* 1 TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1 X3, TB3/L-24.

* 1 TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1 X4, TB3/L-24.

* 1TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. A, TB-3/L-24.

* 1TD CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1X2, TB3/L-25.

* 1TC CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1 X1, TB3/L-26

NOTE: An HPSW pump may auto start if the Jockey Pump is not in service prior to EWST level decreasing to the HPSW pump starting level.

..- 6.2Start the HPSW JOCKEY PUMP

6.3 Clear HPSW Pump breaker logic by momentarily placing HPSW Pump switches in OFF and then return to their normal position (BASE or STANDBY).

* A HPSW PUMP

* B HPSW PUMP

__6.4Monitor EWST level indication to ensure proper altitude valve operation.

6.5 Verify load centers and switchyard feeder are energized by observing the following statalarms EXTINGUISHED.

1* X 2SA-4/A-1 EL 600V LC 1X1 POWER FAILURE

Page 125: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 125 of 202

S* 1 X2 2SA-4/A-2 EL 600V LC 1X2 POWER FAILURE

* 1X3 2SA-4/A-3 EL 600V LC 1X3 POWER FAILURE

* 1 X4 1 SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 1X4 POWER FAILURE

* SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. A SA-5/A-1 SY-1 BATT. TROUBLE"

0

Page 126: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 126 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

CAUTION: * DO NOT start two CCW pumps at once. * Before starting ANY CCW pump, verify that CT-4 or CT-5 has

the capacity to accept the added load ( 2.2 MWe).

* Coordinate starting CCW pumps with Unit 2.

7.0 Re-establish CCW flow through the condenser:

-- 7.1 Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept the additional load per the CT-4 Electrical System Overload Limits enclosure of OP/0/A/1 106/19 (Keowee Hydro at Oconee) OR the CT-5 Electrical System Overload Limits enclosure of OP/0/A/1 110/03 (100KV Power Supply).

7.2 Start the CCW pump with the closed discharge valve.

* 1 CCW PUMP

7.3 Verify that the following valves open:

* 1 CCW-20 (CONDENSER 1 Al OUTLET) (D0272) * 1CCW-21 (CONDENSER 1 A2 OUTLET) (D0274)

* 1 CCW-22 (CONDENSER 1 B1 OUTLET) (D0276)

* 1CCW-23 (CONDENSER 1 B2 OUTLET) (D0278)

* 1 CCW-24 (CONDENSER 1 C1 OUTLET) (D0280) * 1 CCW-2 5 (CONDENSER 1 C2 OUTLET) (D0282)

8.0 Start or verify running a Continuous Priming Vacuum Pump:

* A PRIMING PUMP

* B PRIMING PUMP

9.0 Start at least one GWD Compressor:

9.1 IF starting A GWD Compressor:

9.1.1 Open DW-1 40 (A GWD COMP DW MAKEUP).

9.1.2 When GWD-8 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) opens, place DW-1 40 in AUTO.

.- 9.1.3 Verify GWD-8 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) CLOSED.

Page 127: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 127 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1

9.2 IF starting B GWD Compressor:

9.2.1 Open DW-142 (B GWD COMP DW MAKEUP).

___9.2.2 When GWD-9 (B SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) opens, place DW-142 in AUTO.

---. 9.2.3 Verify GWD-9 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) CLOSED.

__..9.3 Start A AND/OR B GWD Compressor.

.. 9.4Establish 50 inches pressure on Vent Header.

.. 10.0 Verify or establish 50 Inches Vent Header pressure.

11.0 Reset Rela flags on EPSL Cabinets for the following: ocation - Unit 1 Cable Room)

* 1SBC1A _-* 1SBC2A ____* 1RLS1-1

* 1SBC1B * 1SBC2B ___* 1RLS2-1

CAUTION: Additional CCW pumps may be restarted at the Overall Test Coordinator's discretion. Starting of additional CCW pumps should be coordinated with Unit 2. Do NOT start two CCW pumps at once. Verify CT-4 or CT-5 has the capacity to accept the additional load (% 2.2 MWe) prior to starting any CCW pump.

12.0 Start additional CCW pumps at the discretion of the Overall Test Coordinator:

* Start the 1 A CCW pump by performing the following steps:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

2. Start the 1A CCW PUMP

* Start the 1B CCW pump by performing the following steps:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-6 can accept additional load

2. Start the 1B CCW PUMP

* Start the 1C CCW pump by performing the following steps:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

... 2. Start the 1 C CCW PUMP

* Start the 1 D CCW pump by performing the following steps:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

Page 128: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 128 of 202

2. Start the ID CCW PUMP

Page 129: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 129 of 202

Enclosure 13.6

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1 13.0 Have HVAC personnel place in service the A OR B chiller.

13.1 When the "A" OR "B" Chiller is operating, then restart or verify running the following AHUs:

* AHU 1-13

AHU 1-14

* AHU 1-34

* AHU 2-35

AHU 1-22

* AHU 1-23

13.2 Start AHU 1-11 OR 1-12.

AHU 1-11

* AHU 1-12

Page 130: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 130 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

1.0 Verify the MFB's are energized.

_-1.1 IF the MFB's are NOT energized within 1 minute of power loss, then REFER TO Enclosure 13.12 Contingency Actions for Power Restoration.

2.0 When power is restored Verify at least one LPI pump restarts to provide Decay Heat Removal.

2.1 I.F the previously running LPI pump fails to restart, attempt to restart it.

NOTE: Refer to Enclosure 3.23 of OP/2/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection) to start an alternate LPI pump.

2.2 IF the previously running LPI pump will NOT start, then restart an alternate LPI pump.

-- 2.3Verify approximately 3000 GPM LPI flow to the core.

2.4Verify 2 of 3 Unit 1 and 2 LPSW pumps are operating.

2.51 F necessary adjust LPSW flow to the 'in-service' LPI cooler(s) is adequate to maintain RCS temperature stable.

3.0 Verify the following "non-load shed" switchgear and Battery Chargers are energized by verifying the following statalarms are EXTINGUISHED:

* 2X4 2SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 2X4 POWER FAILURE

* 2X5 2SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 2X5 POWER FAILURE

* 2X6 2SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 2X6 POWER FAILURE

* 2X8 2SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 2X8 POWER FAILURE

*2X9 2SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 2X9 POWER FAILURE

* 2X10 2SA-4/C-3 EL 600V LC 2X10 POWER FAILURE

2XS1 * 2XS2 2SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MTR CONTROL CTR

2XS3 TROUBLE

* 2CA Control Battery Charger 2SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 2CA TROUBLE"

2CB Control Battery Charger 2SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 2CB

Page 131: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 131 of 202

* TROUBLE

Page 132: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 132 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

4.0 Reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing "RESET" simultaneously on both:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

and

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

NOTE: IF any of the following hot shutdown loads did NOT restart, note discrepancy and continue with this Enclosure. Do NOT attempt to reset loads.

5.0 Verify the following hot shutdown loads restart:

* 2A HPI PUMP

* 2B HPI PUMP

* 2A MD EFDW PUMP

* 2B MD EFDW PUMP

* 2A CC PUMP

NOTE: The Test Coordinator shall determine when the HPI pumps, MD EFW pumps and CC pumps should be secured. This Enclosure should be continued in the event the Test Coordinator delays shutdown of these pumps. Operations will stop ANY pump that exhibits signs of distress. (bearings, temps, vibration, noise, etc.).

5.1 When directed by the Test Coordinator, verify or place the control switches for the following pumps to the "OFF" position:

* 2A HPI pump

* 2B HPI pump

* 2A MD EFDW pump

* 2B MD EFDW pump

* 2A CC pump

* 2B CC pump

Page 133: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 133 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

NOTE: This Enclosure may be stopped at this point and a dead bus transfer back to the Startup Source performed per Section 12 of the test procedure. However, should the dead bus transfer be delayed, or additional loading on the STBY Busses desired then at the Test Coordinator's and OPS Shift Manager's (OSM's) discretion, this Enclosure should be continued to recover essential loads.

6.0 IF the dead bus transfer to the Startup Source is delayed or at the OSM's and Test Coordinator's discretion, restore essential loads by performing the following:

-- -6.1 Close B2T-4 (4kV FDR BKR B2T-4 SSF 4kV SWGR OTS1 -1)

-6.1.1 Have operator at the SSF close or verify closed breaker OTS1-1 (SSF NORMAL SUPPLY BREAKER B2T)

6.2 Send an Operator to restore the following loads by closing the breakers at the control panels:

* 2TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER # 2X3, TB-3/L31.

2TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT SWITCHYARD FEEDER # B, TBW 3/L-31.

* 2TD CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER # 2X2, TB-3/L30.

* 2TC CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER # 2X1, TB-3/L29.

6.3 Start or verify at least 3 of the following 4 RCW pumps are operating:

* A RCW PUMP

* B RCW PUMP

* C RCW PUMP

* D RCW PUMP

CAUTION: Refer to OP/1&2/A/1 104/06 (Spent Fuel Cooling System) if starting the C SF cooling pump.

6.4 Start or verify running Unit 1 & 2 SF cooling pumps as required:

* A SF COOLING PUMP

B SF COOLING PUMP

Page 134: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 134 of 202

C SF COOLING PUMP

Page 135: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 135 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

6.5 When operator has performed step 6.2, Verify load centers and switchyard feeder are energized by observing the following statalarms EXTINGUISHED.

* 2X1 2SA-4/A-1 EL 600V LC 2X1 POWER FAILURE

* 2X2 2SA-4/A-2 EL 600V LC 2X2 POWER FAILURE

* 2X3 2SA-4/A-3 EL 600V LC 2X3 POWER FAILURE

* SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. B, SA-5/B-4 SY-2 BATT. TROUBLE

CAUTION: Coordinate starting CCWpumps with Unit 1. DO NOT start two CCW pumps at once. Before starting ANY CCW pump, verify that CT-4 or CT-5 has the capacity to accept the added load.

7.0 Re-establish CCW flow through the condenser.

7.1 Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept the additional load per the CT-4 Electrical System Overload Limits enclosure of OP/0/A/1 106/19 (Keowee Hydro at Oconee) OR the CT-5 Electrical System Overload Limits enclosure of OP/0/A/1 110/03 (100KV Power Supply).

7.2 Start the CCW pump with the closed discharge valve.

* 2 CCW PUMP

7.3 Verify that the following valves are OPEN:

* 2CCW-20 (CONDENSER 1Al OUTLET) (D0272)

* 2CCW-21 (CONDENSER 1A2 OUTLET) (D0274)

* 2CCW-22 (CONDENSER 11 OUTLET) (D0276)

* 2CCW-23 (CONDENSER 1 B2 OUTLET) (D0278)

* 2CCW-24 (CONDENSER 1C1 OUTLET) (D0280)

* 2CCW-25 (CONDENSER 1C2 OUTLET) (D0282)

8.0 Start or verify a Continuous Vacuum Priming pump is operating:

* C PRIMING PUMP

* D PRIMING PUMP

Page 136: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 136 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

9.0 Have the Operator at the SSF perform the following:

* Verify Breaker OXSF-4B CLOSED

* Reset SSF-CO Panel Trouble Alarm

* Verify SSF battery chargers operating to maintain batteries.

* Verify SSF HVAC system operating properly.

Verify NO HVAC abnormal alarms as follows:

* SSF Control Room

* Diesel Generator Room

* Equipment Room

* Central Alarm Station (CAS)

* Verify SSF Inverters operating properly. O 10.0 Reset relay flags on EPSL cabinets for: (Location: Unit 2 Cable Room)

* 2SBC1A

* 2SBC1B

* 2SBC2A

* 2SBC2B

2RCS1-1

* 2RLS2-1

CAUTION: At least three CCW pumps should be started on Unit 2 to ensure a siphon source to the CCW Crossover. Starting of additional CCW pumps should be coordinated with Unit 1. Do NOT start two CCW pumps at once. Verify CT-4 or CT-5 has the capacity to accept the additional load (a 2.2 MW) prior to starting ANY CCW pump.

11.0 Start CCW pumps as necessary to achieve > 3 CCW pumps operation:

* Start the 2A CCW PUMP

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

.--- 2. Start the 2A CCW PUMP

Page 137: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 137 of 202

Enclosure 13.7

Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2

* Start the 2B CCW PUMP:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

- 2. Start the 2B CCW PUMP

* Start the 2C CCW PUMP:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

2. Start the 2C CCW PUMP

* Start the 2D CCW PUMP:

1. Verify CT-4/CT-5 can accept additional load

-- 2. Start the 2D CCW PUMP

NOTE: Verify CT-4/CT-5 has capacity to accept more load prior to starting any additional equipment.

0

0

Page 138: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 138 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

1.0 Verify the STANDBY BUS has re-energized the MFB(s).

-1.1 IF the MFB's are NOT enerqized within 1 minute of power loss, then refer to Enclosure 13.12 Contingency Actions for Power Restoration".

1.2 Verify the following Statalarms EXTINGUISHED:

* 3X4, 3SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 3X4 POWER FAILURE

* 3X5, 3SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 3X5 POWER FAILURE

* 3X6, 3SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 3X6 POWER FAILURE

* 3X8, 3SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 3X8 POWER FAILURE

* 3X9, 3SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 3X9 POWER FAILURE

* 3X10, 3SA-4/C-3"EL 600V LC 3X10 POWER FAILURE

* 3XS1, 3XS2 & 3XS3, 3SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MOTOR CONTROL CTR TROUBLE

3CA Control Battery Charger, 3SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 3CA TROUBLE

* 3CB Control Battery Charger, 3SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 3CB TROUBLE

2.0 Verify ES Channels 1 through 8 have actuated (ALL BLUE ES module "AUTO" lights on).

3.0 Verify WHITE ES module "POSITION" lights on the following ES RZ Modules. After verifying position, place each of the following components in "MANUAL .

Channel 1 White Light Depress MANUAL

* HPI-P3A

* HPI-P3B_

* Load Shed &

Stby Bkr 1

Channel 2 White Light Depress MANUAL

Page 139: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 139 of 202

O * HPI-P3B

* HPI-P3C

* Load Shed & Stby Bkr 2

Page 140: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 140 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

Channel 3 White Light Depress MANUAL

* LPI-P3A

* LPSW-P3A

Channel 4 White Light Depress MANUAL

* LPI-P3B_

* LPSW-P3B_

Channel 7 White Light Depress MANUAL

* RBS-P3A

Channel 8 White Light Depress MANUAL

* RBS-P3B_

4.0 Record the following RBS flowrates:

3A RBS pump __----gpm.

3B RBS pump __ gpm. 5.0 Press "MANUAL" on the ES RZ Module for the following:

* RBS P3A

.RBS P313

6.0 Press "OFF" on the ES RZ Module for the following:

* RBS P3A

* RBS P3B

7.0 STOP the running LPI pumps:

* 3A LPI pump

* 36 LPI pump

8.0 STOP the running HPI pumps:

Page 141: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 141 of 202

O * 3A HPI pump . 3B HPI pump

* 3C HPI pump

Page 142: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 142 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

9.0 Place both MD EFDW pumps switches to OFF:

* 3A MD EFDWP

* 3B MD EFDWP

10.0 Verify SF cooling pumps are operating

* 3A SF COOLING PUMP

* 3B SF COOLING PUMP

11.0 STOP the running SF cooling pumps:

* 3A SF COOLING PUMP

* 3B SF COOLING PUMP

12.0 Record the following RBCU LPSW Flowrates:

* 3A Flow ------- gpm.

_* 3B Flow ---------- gpm.

* 3C Flow ------ gpm.

13.0 Verify both Unit 3 LPSW pump are in operation:

* 3A LPSW PUMP

* 3B LPSW PUMP

14.0 Reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing "RESET" simultaneously on both of the following:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

AND

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

15.0 Verify RBCUs are operating in "LOW" as required for ES.

15.1 Take manual control of the 3A, 3B & 3C RBCU's by pressing MANUAL on the ES RZ Module:

Page 143: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 143 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

15.2 Place the following RBCU switches in the LOW position.

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

15.3 Depress PUSH TO RET TO NORMAL AFT ES RESET white buttons.

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

15.4 Position control switches for the RBCUs to OFF.

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU 16.0 Verify the PRV fans are operating.

NOTE: IF any PR valves are NOT OPEN, note discrepancy and continue with procedure.

16.1 Verify the following valves open:

* 3PR-1 5 (3A PRV FAN DISCH)

* 3PR-19 (3B PRV FAN DISCH)

16.2 Take manual control of the PR fans by pressing MANUAL on the ES RZ Module:

16.3 Press OFF on the ES RZ Module for:

* PR FAN-3A (CH. 5)

* PR FAN 3B (CH. 6)

16.4 Verify the following valves CLOSED:

* 3PR-1 5 (3A PRV FAN DISCH)

3PR-19 (3B PRV FAN DISCH)

Page 144: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 144 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

17.0 Verify the following ES Valves are in their ES position:

17.1 CHANNEL 1

* 3HP-24 OPEN * 3HP-3 CLOSE

* 3HP-26 OPEN * 3HP-4 CLOSE

* 3HP-20 CLOSE * 3GWD-12 CLOSE

* 3LWD-1 CLOSE * 3CS-5 CLOSE

* 3PR-7 CLOSE * 3PR-9 CLOSE

* 3RC-5 CLOSE * 3RC-6 CLOSE

* 3FDW-105 CLOSE * 3FDW-107 CLOSE

17.2 CHANNEL 2

* 3HP-25 OPEN

* 3HP-27 OPEN

3FDW-103 CLOSE * 3FDW-104 CLOSE

17.3 CHANNEL 3

* 3LP-17 OPEN

17.4 CHANNEL 7

* 3BS-1 OPEN

17.5 CHANNEL 5

* 3CC-7 CLOSE --- 3LPSW-1 5 CLOSE

* 3LPSW-6 CLOSE * 3LPSW-565 CLOSE

* 3LPSW-566 OPEN _* 3LPSW-1 8 OPEN

* 3LPSW-21 OPEN

17.6 CHANNEL 4 . * 3LP-18 OPEN

Page 145: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 145 of 202

13.8

Actions Following Load Shed and E.S. Actuation for Unit 3

17.7 CHANNEL 8

* 3BS-2 OPEN

17.8 CHANNEL 6

* 3LPSW-24 OPEN

NOTE: This Enclosure ma be stopped at this point and a dead bus transfer back to the startup source performed per Section 12 of the test procedure. However, should the dead bus transfer be delayed, then at the Test Coordinator's and OPS Shift Manager's (OSM's) discretion, this Enclosure should be continued to recover SF cooling.

18.0 Send an Operator to perform Enclosure 13.8A (Restoring Unit 3 Loads Outside the Control Room).

19.0 When notified that the load centers are energized, verify the following statalarms are EXTINGUISHED:

* 3X1, 3SA-4/A-1 EL 600V LC 3X1 POWER FAILURE

* 3X2, 3SA-4/A-2 EL 600V LC 3X2 POWER FAILURE * 3X3, 3SA-4/A-3 EL 600V LC 3X3 POWER FAILURE

20.0 Reset the following relay flags on EPSL cabinets:

* 3SBC1A * 3SBC2A -__* 3RLS1-1

* 3SBC1B * 3SBC2B ___*- 3RLS2-1

21.OStart OR Verify running the following AHVs:

* AHU 3-11 OR AHU 3-12

* AHU 3-13 OR * AHU 3-14

* AHU 3-15 OR * AHU 3-16

_* AHU OAC 3-1

_* CU OAC 3-1

Page 146: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 146 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.8A

Restoring Unit 3 Loads Outside The Control Room

1.0 WHEN directed by the Unit 3 Control Room restore the following loads by closing the breakers at the control panels:

* 3TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 3X3, TB-3/L-45

* 3TD CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 3X2, TB-3/L-44

* 3TC CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 3X1, TB-3/L-43

CAUTION: Forced CCW flow should be established prior to performing step 2.0.

2.0 Vent both CCW Booster Pumps and close vent following completion of venting:

* 3CCW-367 (3A CCW Booster Pump Vent) (TB-1, J-50)

* 3CCW-368 (38 CCW Booster Pump Vent) (TB-1, H-49)

3.0 Close the following valves:

* 3CCW-353 (3A CCW Booster Pump Regulator) at the CCW FLOW CONTROL SELECTOR STATION.

* 3CCW-354 (3B CCW Booster Pump Regulator) at the CCW FLOW CONTROL SELECTOR STATION.

-----4.0 Ad just the Setpoint to a high temperature (> 1 00F).

... 5.0 Go to AUTO control and verify that valves remain CLOSED.

6.0 Close the following RCW Pump Discharge Isolation valves using the MANUAL LOADERS:

* 3RCW-358 (3A RCW PUMP REGULATOR) (TB-1, C-54)

* 3RCW-357 (3B RCW PUMP REGULATOR)(TB-1, C-54)

7.0 Contact Unit 3 Control Room and have them perform the following steps:

7.1 Start one CCW Booster pump:

* 3A CCW BOOSTER PUMP

* 3B CCW BOOSTER PUMP

Page 147: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 147 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.8A

Restoring Unit 3 Loads Outside The Control Room

7.2 Start one RCW pump:

* 3A RCW PUMP

* 3B RCW PUMP

7.3 Start the following SF cooling pumps:

* 3A SF COOLING PUMP

* 3B SF COOLING PUMP

NOTE: Steps 8.0 & 9.0 - Slowly throttle CCW and RCW flow to the RCW Coolers at the same time.

8.0 At the CCW FLOW CONTROL SELECTOR STATION, gradually decrease the temperature Setpoint to - 700F.

9.0 Using the MANUAL LOADER, slowly throttle RCW Pump Discharge Isolation valves on the RCW pump ust started, to 50 to 60 psig (3A & 3B RCW PUMP HEADER PRESS GA).

* 3RCW-358 (3A RCW PUMP MANUAL LOADER)(TB-1, C-54)

* 3RCW-357 (3B RCW PUMP MANUAL LOADER)(TB-1, C-54)

Page 148: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 148 of 202

Enclosure 13.9

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

-1.0 Verify the MFB's are energized.

2.0 When power is restored Verify at least one LPI pump restarts to provide Decay Heat Removal.

2.1 I F the previously running LPI pump fails to restart, attempt to restart it.

NOTE: Refer to Enclosure 3.23 of OP/2/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection) to start an alternate LPI pump.

2.2 IF the previously running LPI pump will NOT start, then restart an alternate LPI pump.

.__2.3Verify approximately 3000 GPM LPI flow to the core.

2.4Verify 2 of 3 Unit 1 and 2 LPSW pumps are operating.

2.51F necessary adjust LPSW flow to the 'in-service' LPI cooler(s) is adequate to maintain RCS temperature stable.

3.0 Verify the following "non-load shed" switchgear and Battery Chargers are energized by verifying the following statalarms are EXTINSGISHED:

* 1 X5 1 SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 1 X5 POWER FAILURE

* 1X6 1 SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 1 X6 POWER FAILURE

* 1X7 1 SA-4/A-7 EL 600V LC 1 X7 POWER FAILURE

* 1X8 1 SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 1 X8 POWER FAILURE

* 1X9 1 SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 1 X9 POWER FAILURE

* 1X10 1 SA-4/C-3 EL 600V LC 1 X1 0 POWER FAILURE

* 1XS1 * 1 XS2 1 SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MOTOR CONTRL CTR

* 1XS3 TROUBLE

* 1CA Control Battery Charger 1 SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 1 CA TROUBLE

* 1 CB Control Battery Charger 1 SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 1 CB TROUBLE

Page 149: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 149 of 202

Enclosure 13.9

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

4.0 IF a load shed has occurred, reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing "RESET" simultaneously on both:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

AND

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

NOTE: IF the following hot shutdown loads do NOT restart, note discrepancy and continue with Enclosure.

5.0 I F running this Enclosure after a transfer to the Keowee Overhead (Test 1T2.2), then verify the following hot shutdown loads restarted:

* A HPI pump

* B HPI pump

- * 1A MD EFDW pump

* 1B MD EFDW pump

_* A CC pump

* B CC pump

6.0 Verify or place the control switches for the following pumps to the OFF position:

* A HPI pump

* 1B HPI pump

* 1A MD EFDW pump

* 1 B MD EFDW pump

* 1A CC pump

* B CC pump

Page 150: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 150 of 202

Enclosure 13.9

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

NOTE: Control Room Actions to restore loads may be performed in parallel with actions being performed outside the Control Room.

7.0 Restore essential loads:

7.1 Send an Operator to restore the following loads by closing the breakers at the control panels:

* TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1X3, TB-3/L-24.

* TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1X4, TB-3/L-24.

* 1TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. A, TB3/L-24.

* 1TD CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1X2, TB-3/L-25.

* 1TC CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 1X1, TB-3/L-26.

-__7.2Start the HPSW Jockey Pump

7.3 Clear HPSW Pump breaker logic by momentarily placing HPSW Pump switches in OFF and then return to their normal position (BASE or STANDBY).

* A HPSW PUMP

* B HPSW PUMP

__7.4Monitor EWST level indication to ensure proper altitude valve operation.

7.5 Verify load centers and switchyard feeder are energized by verifying the following statalarms are EXTINGUISHED:

* 1X1 2SA-4/A-1 EL 600V LC 1X1 POWER FAILURE

* 1X2 2SA-4/A-2 EL 600V LC 1X2 POWER FAILURE

* 1 X3 2SA-4/A-3 EL 600V LC 1 X3 POWER FAILURE

* 1 X4 1 SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 1 X4 POWER FAILURE

* SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. A SA-5/A-1 SY-1 BATT. TROUBLE

8.0 Start or verify running a Continuous Priming Vacuum Pump:

* A PRIMING pump

B PRIMING pump

Page 151: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 151 of 202

Enclosure 13.9

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

9.0 Start at least one GWD Compressor:

9.1.0 IF starting B GWD Compressor:

9.1.1 Open DW-140 (A GWD COMP DW MAKEUP).

-- 9.1.2 When GWD-8 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) OPENS, place DW-1 40 in AUTO.

9.1.3 Verify GWD-8 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) CLOSED.

9.2.0 IF starting B GWD Compressor:

9.2.1 Open DW-142 (B GWD COMP DW MAKEUP).

9.2.2 When GWD-9 (B SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) OPENS, place DW-142 in AUTO.

9.2.3 Verify GWD-9 (A SEPARATOR TANK DRAIN) CLOSED.

... 9.3Start A AND/OR B GWD Compressor.

9.4Establish 50 inches pressure on Vent Header.

NOTE: "B" Chiller is preferred because power will be interrupted to Unit 2 only 4 times.

10.0 IF necessary (as determined by Test Coordinator), notify the HVAC personnel to start the "A" OR 'B" chiller.

NOTE: Three CCW pumps should be restarted on Unit 1 to ensure siphon flow will be available. Operations will determine which CCW pumps should be started.

11.0 Restart CCW pumps to achieve 3 CCW pump operation as follows:

11.1 Start the 1 -__ CCW pump with the closed discharge valve:

11.2 Verify Condenser Discharge Valves OPEN:

* 1 CCW-20 (CONDENSER 1 Al OUTLET) (D0272)

* 1 CCW-21 (CONDENSER 1 A2 OUTLET) (D0274)

* 1CCW-22 (CONDENSER 1 B1 OUTLET) (D0276)

* 1 CCW-23 (CONDENSER 1 B2 OUTLET) (D0278)

S1 CCW-24 (CONDENSER 1C1 OUTLET) (D0280)

Page 152: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 152 of 202

1 CCW-25 (CONDENSER 1C2 OUTLET) (D0282)

Enclosure 13.9 Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1

11.3 Send an Operator to manually throttle open the following valves to vent the CCW inlet piping located at the CCW Intake Structure.

* 1CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr A High Point Vent).

* 1 CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr B High Point Vent).

11.4 Start the 1_- CCW pump

11.5 Start the 1 __ CCW pump

11.6 Close the following valves when the CCW inlet piping is vented:

* 1CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr A High Point Vent).

* 1 CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr B High Point Vent).

12.0 Reset Relay flags on EPSL Cabinets for the following: (Location - Unit 1 Cable Room)

* 1SBC1A

* 1SBC1B

* 1SBC2A

* 1SBC2B

* 1RLS1-1

* 1RLS2-1

13.0 IF electrical transfers are complete for the day OR resumptioin of testing is significantly delayed, then restart Auxiliar Building Ventilation per OP/0/A/1 104/41 (Auxiliary Building Ventilation) at the OPS Shift Manager's discretion.

Page 153: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 153 of 202

Enclosure 13.10

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

1.0 Verify the MFB's are energized.

2.0 When power is restored Verify at least one LPI pump restarts to provide Decay Heat Removal.

2.1 IF the previously running LPI pump fails to restart, attempt to restart it.

NOTE: Refer to Enclosure 3.23 of OP/2/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection) to start an alternate LPI pump.

2.2 IF the previously running LPI pump will NOT start, then restart an alternate LPI pump.

- 2.3Verify approximately 3000 GPM LPI flow to the core.

2.4Verify 2 of 3 Unit 1 and 2 LPSW pumps are operating.

--2.51F necessary adjust LPSW flow to the 'in-service' LPI cooler(s) is adequate to maintain RCS temperature stable.

3.0 Verify the following "non-load shed" switchgear and Battery Chargers are energized by verifying the following statalarms are EXTING ISHED:

* 2X4 2SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 2X4 POWER FAILURE

* 2X5 2SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 2X5 POWER FAILURE

* 2X6 2SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 2X6 POWER FAILURE

* 2X8 2SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 2X8 POWER FAILURE

*.2X9 2SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 2X9 POWER FAILURE

* 2X10 2SA-4/C-3 EL 600V LC 2X10 POWER FAILURE

2XS 1 * 2XS2 2SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MOTOR CONTRL CTR

2XS3 TROUBLE

* 2CA Control Battery Charger 2SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 2CA TROUBLE

* 2CB Control Battery Charger 2SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 2CB TROUBLE

Page 154: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 154 of 202

Enclosure 13.10

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

4.0 IF a load shed has occurred, reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing "RESET" simultaneously on both:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

AND

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

NOTE: IF the following hot shutdown loads do NOT restart, note discrepancy and continue with Enclosure.

5.0 IF running this Enclosure after a transfer to the Keowee Overhead (Test 12.2), then verify the following hot shutdown loads restarted:

* 2A HPI pump

* 2B HPI pump

* 2A MD EFDW pump

* 2B MD EFDW pump

* 2A CC pump

* 2B CC pump

6.0 Verify or place the control switches for the following pumps to the "OFF' position:

* 2A HPI pump

* 2B HPI pump

* 2A MD EFDW pump

* 2B MD EFDW pump

* 2A CC pump

* 2B CC pump

Page 155: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 155 of 202

Enclosure 13.10

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

NOTE: Control Room Actions to restore essential loads may be performed in parallel with actions being performed outside the Control Room.

7.0 Restore essential loads:

7.1 Send an Operator to restore the following loads by closing the breakers at the control panels:

* 2TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 2X3, TB3/L-31.

* 2TE CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. B, TB-3/L-31.

* 2TD CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 2X2, TB3/L-30.

* 2TC CONTROL PANEL, 600 VOLT TRANSFORMER NO. 2X1, TB3/L-29.

7.2CLOSE OR Verify CLOSED B2T-4 (4kV FDR BKR B2T-4 SSF 4kV SWGR OTS1-1T

7.3 Start OR Verify at least 3 of the following 4 RCW pumps are operating:

* A RCW PUMP

* B RCW PUMP

* C RCW PUMP

* D RCW PUMP

CAUTION: Refer to OP/1&2/A/1 104/06 (Spent Fuel Cooling System) if starting the C SF cooling pump.

7.4 Start OR Verify running SF cooling pumps as determined necessary by Operations:

* A SF COOLING PUMP

* B SF COOLING PUMP

* C SF COOLING PUMP

Page 156: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 156 of 202

Enclosure 13.10

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

7.5 When operator has performed step 7.1, Verify load centers and switchyard feeder are energized by observing the following statalarms EXTINGUIHED

* 2X1 2SA-4/A-1 EL 600V LC 2X1 POWER FAILURE

* 2X2 2SA-4/A-2 EL 600V LC 2X2 POWER FAILURE

* 2X3 2SA-4/A-3 EL 600V LC 2X3 POWER FAILURE

* SWITCHYARD FEEDER NO. B, SA-5/B-4 SY-2 BATT. TROUBLE

NOTE: Three CCW pumps should be restarted on Unit 2 to ensure siphon flow will be available. Operations will determine which CCW pumps should be started.

8.0 Restart CCW pumps to achieve 3 CCW pump operation as follows:

8.1 Start the 2-_ CCW pump with the closed discharge valve:

8.1.1. Verify Condenser Discharge Valves OPEN:

* 2CCW-20 (CONDENSER 1A1 OUTLET) (D0272)

* 2CCW-21 (CONDENSER 1A2 OUTLET) (D0274)

* 2CCW-22 (CONDENSER 113B OUTLET) (D0276)

* 2CCW-23 (CONDENSER 1 B2 OUTLET) (D0278)

* 2CCW-24 (CONDENSER 1C1 OUTLET) (D0280)

* 2CCW-25 (CONDENSER 1 C2 OUTLET) (D0282)

8.1.2 Manually throttle OPEN the following valves to vent the CCW inlet piping located at the CCW Intake Structure.

* 2CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2A High Point Vent)

* 2CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2B High Point Vent)

.8.1.3 Start the 2-_ CCW pump

8.1.4 Start the 2 CCW pump

8.1.5 Close the following valves when the CCW inlet piping is vented:

* 2CCW-26 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2A High Point Vent)

Page 157: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 157 of 202

-* 2CCW-28 (Cond Inlet Hdr 2B High Point Vent)

Enclosure 13.10 Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2

9.0 Start or verify a Continuous Vacuum Priming pump is operating:

* C PRIMING PUMP

D PRIMING PUMP

10.0 Reset relay flags on EPSL cabinets for: (Location: Unit 2 Cable Room)

2SBC1A

. 2SBC1B

.. 2SBC2A

* 2SBC2B

* 2RCS1-1

* 2RLS2-1 . 11.0 Send an Operator to the SSF to perform the following:

* Verify Breaker OTS1-1 CLOSED

* Verify Breaker OXSF-4B CLOSED

* Reset SSF-CO Panel Trouble Alarm

* Verify SSF battery chargers operating to maintain batteries.

* Verify SSF HVAC system operating properly.

* Verify ND abnormal alarms as follows:

* SSF Control Room

* Diesel Generator Room

* Equipment Room

* Central Alarm Station (CAS)

* Verify SSF Inverters operating properly.

Page 158: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 158 of 202

Enclosure 13.11

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3 1.0 Verify the MFB's are energized.

2.0 Verify the following non-load shed switchgear and Battery Chargers are energized by verifying that the following statalarms are EX IN(ELESHE D:

* 3X4 3SA-4/A-4 EL 600V LC 3X4 POWER FAILURE

* 3X5 3SA-4/A-5 EL 600V LC 3X5 POWER FAILURE

* 3X6 3SA-4/A-6 EL 600V LC 3X6 POWER FAILURE

* 3X8 3SA-4/A-8 EL 600V LC 3X8 POWER FAILURE

* 3X9 3SA-4/A-9 EL 600V LC 3X9 POWER FAILURE

*3X10 3SA-4/C-3 EL 600V LC 3X1 0 POWER FAILURE

3XS 1 * 3XS2 3SA-4/D-6 EL ENG SAFEGUARDS MOTOR CONTRL CTR

3XS3 TROUBLE

* 3CA Control Battery Charger 3SA-5/A-1 1 EL DC SYSTEM 3CA TROUBLE

* 3CB Control Battery Charger 3SA-6/A-1 EL DC SYSTEM 3CB TROUBLE

3.0 IF a load shed has occurred, reset the MFB Monitor Panel Load Shed Circuitry by pressing RESET simultaneously on both:

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 1 RESET

AND

* MFB UNDERVOLTAGE CHANNEL 2 RESET

NOTE: IF the following hot shutdown loads do NOT restart, note discrepancy and continue with Enclosure.

4.0 IF running this Enclosure after a transfer to the Keowee Overhead (Test 12.2), then verify the following hot shutdown loads restarted:

* 3A HPI pump

* 3B HPI pump

* 3A MD EFDW pump

* 3B MD EFDW pump

Page 159: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 159 of 202

* 3A CC pump

* 3B CC pump

Page 160: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 160 of 202

Enclosure 13.11

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3

5.0 Verify OR place the control switches for the following pumps to the "OFF position:

* 3A HPI pump

* 3B HPI pump

* 3A MD EFDW pump

* 3B MD EFDW pump

* 3A CC pump

* 3B CC pump

NOTE: If running this Enclosure after a transfer to the STBY Busses, then this Enclosure may be stopped at this point and a dead bus transfer to the Startup Source performed per Section 12 of this procedure. However, if the dead bus transfer will be delayed, then at the Test Coordinator's discretion, continue with this Enclosure and recover essential loads.

6.0 Dispatch an Operator to perform Enclosure 13.8A (Restoring Unit 3 Loads Outside the Control Room).

7.0 WHEN notified that the load centers are energized, verify the following statalarms are EXTINGUISHED:

* 3X1, 3SA-4/A-1, EL 600V LC 3X1 POWER FAILURE

* 3X2, 3SA-4/A-2, EL 600V LC 3X2 POWER FAILURE

* 3X3, 3SA-4/A-3, EL 600V LC 3X3 POWER FAILURE

8.0 WHEN notified by the Operator that is performing Enclosure 13.8A, perform the following: 8.1 Start one CCW Booster Pump:

* 3A CCW BOOSTER PUMP

* 3B CCW BOOSTER PUMP

8.2 Start one RCW pump:

* 3A RCW PUMP

* 3B RCW PUMP

Page 161: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 161 of 202

Enclosure 13.11

Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3

9.0 Verify the following SF Cooling Pumps are Operating OR Start as required:

* 3A SF COOLING PUMP

* 3B SF COOLING PUMP

9.1 Refer to OP/3/A/1 104/06, Spent Fuel Cooling System for starting 3C SF Cooling Pump.

0

S

Page 162: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 162 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION

Use the following sections of Enclosures CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1(Enclosure 13.12A), UNIT 2(Enclosure 13.12B) AND UNIT 3 (Enclosure 13.12C) to recover power to the three Unit's MFBs.

Section 1 .1 IF KE WEE UNDERGROUND FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY QCONEE UNIT MFB'S. Recovery from Startup Trans ormer.

Section 2 IF STATUP SOURCE FAILS TO ENERGIZE MFBS AND THE NORM4AL SOURCE IS AVAILABLE. Recovery from Auxiliary Transformer (N breakers)

Section 1.3 IF BOTH THE STARTUP SQURCE AND NORMAL SOURCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFBS. Recovery from CT-5

Section 2.1 IF CT- FAILS TO PROVIDE POWR TO ANY OCONEE ITq MFB. Recovery from CT-4 (Keowee Underground).

Section 2. IF BOTH CT-5 AND HE KEQWEE UNDERGROUND FAILS TO CONNECT AND ENER lZ E THE MFBS. Recovery frorm Startup Transformer (Keowee Overhead).

Section 3. IF KE WEE OVERHEAD FAILS TO PRQVIDE POWER TO ANY CONEE JNIT MIFB Recovery from Startup Transformer/System Grid.

Section 3. IF KEOWEE OVERHEAD UNIT AND KEOWEE UNDERGROUND NIT FAILS TO ENERGIZE ANY UNIT'S MFB'S. Recovery

from Auxiliary Transformer (N breakers).

Section 3.3 IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOURCE, KEOWEE UNDERGROUND, AND NORMAL 5QRCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFB'-. Recovery from CT-5.

Page 163: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 163 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

1.0 Steps 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following sections:

12.1 Block Loading of Three Unit Loss of Offsite Power(LOOP) Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.3 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Accelerating Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.4 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid.

12.5 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid.

1.1 IF KEQWEE INDERgROJND FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNIT MFB S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Underground fail, the Oconee Units should return to the Startup Transformer. This transfer should occur automatically once the Startup Transformers are re-energized per the test procedure. The "retransfer to startup" logic will reenergize the MFB's once the EPSL senses NO voltage on both STBY Busses AND Voltage on the Startup Transformer. Consult Emerency Plan if MFB's are de-energized for greater than or equal to 15 mnutes.

1.1.1 Verify MFBs are receiving power from the Startup Transformer:

* S1 (STBY BUS 1 to MFB1) OPEN

* S21 (STBY BUS 2 to MFB2) OPEN

* El1 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

* E21 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

1.1.2 I.F a retransfer to startup occurs, perform the following Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1)

Page 164: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 164 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

1.2 IF STARTUP SPJRCE FAILS TO ENERGIZE MFBS AND THE NO)RMAL SOURCE IS AVAILABLE.

1.2.1 Place the following Unit 1 AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

1.2.2 Open OR verify open the following breakers:

SS11 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S21 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* Ell (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E21 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

ENCLOSURE 13.12A CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

1.2.3 Close the "N" breakers by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 1 MFB1 and 1 MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 1 MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1i, on BlT-2.

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB1 1, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "NI1 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB11, metal plate and close the cover.

Page 165: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 165 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

c. Perform the following to energize 1MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2j, on B2T-12.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB21, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N21 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2j, metal plate and close the cover.

1.2.4 When power is restored to the MFBs, Perform Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1)

NOTE: Unit 1 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems should be operating within 1 hour after the transformer is backcharged.

1.2.5 Verify Unit 1 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 QR 1X2.

1.2.6 Verify Unit 1 Auxiliary Transformer (1T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 OR 1X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

Page 166: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 166 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

. IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOURCE AND NORMAL SOURCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFBS AND CT-5 IS AVAILABLE.

1.3.1 On ALL Oconee Units, place the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to ANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 3

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: The "S" breakers will be opened in manual for ALL Units prior to energizing the STBY buses from CT-5. This will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at once on CT-5. The Oconee Units will be loaded on CT-5 on Unit at a time per this procedure.

1.3.2 Open or verify open the following breakers:

UNIT 1

* S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S21 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 3

SS13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

Page 167: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 167 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

1.3.3 From Unit 2, energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

CAUTION: Restoration of power to ALL three units must be coordinated with Unit 1 taking the lead.

1.3.4 Energize the Unit 1's MFBs from CT-5 by performing:

a. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 1A HPI PUMP

* lB HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFW PUMP

* 1B MD EFW PUMP

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for closing the Standby Bus breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

b. Energize Unit 1's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 , STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

c. Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to AUTO:

_/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

d. IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1) to restore essential loads for Unit 1.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

1.3.5 IF power has NQT been restored to Unit 1 MFB's, dispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standby per AP/0/A/1700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

Page 168: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 168 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

1.3.6 IF Unit 1 MFB's do NOT have power refer to AP1/IA/1700/26 (1Loss of DHR) to use the Steam Generators for heat transfer.

1.3.7 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 1's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power per AP/1/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power).

2.0 Steps 2.1 and 2.2 outlines the contingency plans for the following section:

12.6 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP onto the Lee Combustion Turbine.

2. IF CT-5 FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNITS MFB.

NOTES: 1. Should CT-5 fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the Keowee Underground in approximately one second.

2. Should the Keowee Underground then fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the startup transformers.

3.- Consult Emergency Plan if power to the MFBs is lost for greater than or equal to 15 minutes.

2.1.1 Verify the Oconee Units are receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify OPEN the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

b. Verify CLOSED the following breakers:

* SKi CT4 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SK2 CT4 STBY BUS 2 FDR

2.1.2 Perform Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1).

2.1.3 IF the Keowee Underground unit is energizing the STBY Busses, then transfer back to the startup source per the test procedure.

0 STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

Page 169: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 169 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

2.2 I BOTH CT-5 AND THE KEOWEE UNDERGROUND FAIL T( C:ONNEC:T AND ENERGIZE THE MFBS.

2.2.1 Verify Unit 1 is being powered from the Startup Transformer:

_* S1 (TBY BUS 1 TO MFB1) OPEN

* S21 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2) OPEN

* El 1 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

* E2 1 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

2.2.2 I F a retransfer to startup occurs, Stop this Enclosure and perform the following Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following

ead Bus Transfer for Unit 1).

2.3 IF the startup source fails to energize the affected Unit(s) MFBs and the normal source is available, then energize the MFBs from the normal source by performing the following on the affected Unit(s):

2.3.1 Place the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL U

MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

*STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

2.3.2 Open or Verify Open the following breakers:

* S1 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S21 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* El1 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E21 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

2.3.3 Send an Operator t the 1 MFB1 and 1 MFB2 sync check relays. (Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

2.3.4 Perform the following to energize 1 MFB1:

S a. Remove the cover from the sync check relay,

Page 170: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 170 of 202

25XB1 1, on B1T-2.

Page 171: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 171 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

b. Energize the output of sync check relay 25XB1 1, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N11 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

c. Release sync check relay, 25XB11, metal plate and close the cover.

2.3.5 Perform the following to energize 1 MFB2:

a. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB21, on B2T-2.

-- b. Energize the output of sync check relay 25XB2 1, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N21 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

c. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 1, metal plate and close the cover.

2.3.6 When power is resored to the MFBs, Perform Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1)

NOTE: After the MFB(s) are energized, ensure the Unit 1 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems are operation within I hour after the transformer is backcharged.

2.3.7 Verify Unit 1 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 or 1X2.

2.3.8 Verify Unit 1 Auxiliary Transformer (1T) oil pumps and fans are power from 1X1 or 1X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

Page 172: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 172 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

3.0 Steps 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following section:

12.2 Block Loading of Three Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Overhead Powerpath after a Keowee Load Rejection from the Grid and a Switchyard Isolation.

11,. IF KEQWEE OVERHEAD FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNIT IMFB'S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Overhead fail to energize the MFBs, the Oconee Units will transfer to the Keowee Underground unit in ;31 seconds. Consult Emergency Plan if power to the MFBs is lost for greater than or equal to 15 minutes.

3.1 Verify that Unit 1 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify OPEN the following breakers:

* El1 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

* E21 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

b. Verify CLOSED the following breakers:

* S1 STBY BUS 1 to MFB 1

* S21 STBY BUS 2 to MFB 2

3.1.2 IF Unit 1 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground, begin Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1)

CONTINUE with this Enclosure.

NOTE: 1. This procedure places priority on restoring the System Grid to the Startup Transformers even IF neither Keowee Unit is successful at energizing the affected Unit(s) MFBs.

2. The OSM may decide to transfer to the normal source OR CT-5 prior to OR in parallel with restoring the System Grid to the tartup Transformers.

3.1.3 I.F the Keowee Unit fails to energize the Startup Transformers, then energize the Startup Transformers from the System Grid by performing the following:

Page 173: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 173 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

a. Reset the External Grid Trouble Protection System by depressing the reset pushbuttons for both channels from Unit 2 Control Room:

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 2 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 2 RESET

b. Verify the following statalarms NQT ILLUMINATED:

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-2)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-4)

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-1)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-3)

3.1.4 IF Unit 1 is NOT receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit perform the following to energize the Startup Transformers from the System Grid:

-- a. Open OR verify open PCB-1 8

b. Close PCB-1 7

3.1.5 IF Unit 1's MFBs are re-energized from the Startup Transformers after completion of step 3.1.4, begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1)

CONTINUE with this enclosure.

3.1.6 I F ANY Unit is receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit, then synchronize the Keowee Overhead Unit to the System Grid per step 12.2.22 as described in the test procedure.

3.1.7 Notify Keowee Operations to open OR verify open Overhead ACB for the Keowee Overhead Unit.

Page 174: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 174 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

3.1.8 Close OR verify closed the following PCB's:

* PCB-1 2 * PCB-1 5 __* PCB-1 7

* PCB-18 * PCB-26 ___* PCB-27

* PCB-28 _ PCB-30 ___* PCB-33

* PCB-8 * PCB-9 * PCB-21

* PCB-24

3.1.9 IF Unit 1 is receiving power from the Lee CT or Keowee Underground, then when the System Grid had been reestablished to the Startup Transformers, then transfer Unit 1 from the Keowee Underground OR Lee CT to the Startup Transformers.

3.1.10 Place the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ _ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ _* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: 1. Step 3.1.11 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 1. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

2. If any Keowee Unit is receiving auxiliary power from CX, power will be temporarily lost until transfer is complete.

3.1.11 Simultaneously open the following breakers:

_/ * S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

/ * S21 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

3.1.12 After 3 seconds, close the following breakers:

_/ _ El1 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

-- _/ -* E21 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

3.1.13 Place the following Unit 1 transfer switches to AUTO:

__._/- STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

Page 175: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 175 of 202

/J * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 176: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 176 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1 3.1.14 IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.9 (Actions

Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1). STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

3.2 IF KEQWEE OVERHEAD JNIT AND KEOWEE UNDERGROUND UNIT FAILS TO ENER(GIZE ANY UNIT'S MFB'S.

3.2.1 Energize the MFBs from the Normal Source by placing the following Unit 1 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

_/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ _* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ _* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

3.2.2 Open QR verify open the following Unit 1 Breakers:

* S1 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB 1) * S21 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB 2)

* El 1 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E21 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

3.2.3 Energize the MFBs from the Auxiliary Transformer by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 1 MFB1 and 1 MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 1MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1j, on B1T-2.

--- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB1 , by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N11 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB11, metal plate and close the cover.

Page 177: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 177 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

c. Perform the following to energize 1 MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 1, on B2T-12.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB2 1, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a Den and hold while the operator at "N21 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

--- 3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2j, metal plate and close the cover.

3.2.4 When power is restored to the MFB's, begin Enclosure 13.9 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 1)

NOTE: After the MFB(s) are energized, ensure the Unit 1 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems are operating within I hour after the transformer is backcharged.

3.2.5. Verify Unit 1 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 OR 1X2.

3.2.6 Verify Unit 1 Auxiliary Transformer (1T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 1 X1 OR 1X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for closing the Lee breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

S IF BOTH THE STARTUP SQIRCE KEOWEE UNDERGROLND. AND NORMAL -SOURC:E FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFB'S.

3.3.1 Energize the Unit 1's MFBs from CT-5 by placing the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

._* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 178: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 178 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

UNIT 3

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: Opening the "S" breakers for ALL units will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at once on CT-5.

3.3.2 Open or verify open the following breakers on all Oconee Units:

UNIT 1

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 1 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 2 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 3

SS1 3 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 3 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

3.3.3 Energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for loading the Standby Bus must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

Page 179: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 179 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1 3.3.4 Energize the Oconee Units MFBs from CT-5 by performing

the following:

UNIT 1

a. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 1A HPI PUMP

* 1B HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFDW PUMP

* 1B MD EFDW PUMP

b. Energize Unit 1's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2, STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

c. Perform Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1) to restore essential loads for Unit 1.

UNIT 2

d. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 2A HPI PUMP

* 2B HPI PUMP

* 2A MD EFDW PUMP

* 2B MD EFDW PUMP

e. Energize Unit 2's MFBs by closing the following brea ers:

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

f. Perform Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2) to restore essential loads for Unit 2.

Page 180: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 180 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12A

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 1

UNIT 3

g. Place the switches for the following pumps in the OFF positions:

* 3A HPI PUMP

* 3B HPI PUMP

* 3A MD EFDW PUMP

* 3B MD EFDW PUMP

h. Energize Unit 3's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S13 (STBY BUS 2 to MFB1)

*S23 (STBY BUS 2 to MFB2)

i. IF power is restored perform Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus transfer for Unit 3) to restore essential loads for Unit 3.

3.3.5 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2 MFB's, dispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standby per AP/0/A/1 700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

3.3.6 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 1's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power by referring to AP/l/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power) for the applicable Oconee Unit.

3.3.7 I F Unit 1 MFB's do NOT have power refer to AP/1/A/1700/26 (Loss of DHR) to prepare to use the Steam Generators for heat transfer.

Page 181: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 181 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

1.0 Steps 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following sections:

12.1 Block Loading of Three Unit Loss of Offsite Power(LOOP) Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.3 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Accelerating Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.4 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid

12.5 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid.

1.1 IF KEOWEE UNDERGROUND FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNIT MFB'S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Underground fail, the Oconee Units should return to the Startup Transformer. This transfer should occur automatically once the Startup Transformers are re-energized per the test procedure. The "retransfer to startup" logic will re-energize the MFB's once the EPSL senses NO voltage on both STBY Busses AND Voltage on the Startup Transformer. Consult Emergency Plan is power to the MFBs is lost for greater than or equal to 15 minutes.

1.1.1 Verify MFBs are receiving power from the Startup Transformer:

* S1 2 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1 )OPEN

* S2 2 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2) OPEN

* El2 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

* E22 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

1.1.2 IF a retransfer to startup occurs, perform the following Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2)

STOP this Enclosure.

Page 182: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 182 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

1_.2 IF THE STARTUP SOURCE FAILS TO ENERGIZE THE AFFECTED UNIT(S) MFBS AND THE N)RMAL SOURCE IS AVAILABLE.

1.2.1 Place the following Unit 2 AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

1.2.2 Open OR verify open the following breakers:

* S1 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S22 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* El 2 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E22 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

1.2.3 Close the "N" breakers by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 2MFB1 and 2MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 1 MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 2, on B1T-2.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB12, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) wit a pen and hold while the operator at "N12 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 2, metal plate and close the cover.

c. Perform the following to energize 2MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 2, on B2T-12.

-2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB22 , by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) wit a pen and hold while the operator at "N22 MFB2

Page 183: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 183 of 202

NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

Page 184: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 184 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 2, metal plate and close the cover.

1.2.4 When power is restored to the MFBs, perform Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2)

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

NOTE: Unit 2 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems should be operating within 1 hour after the transformer is backcharged.

1.2.5 Verify Unit 2 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 2X1 or 2X2.

1.2.6 Verify Unit 2 Auxiliary Transformer (2T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 or 2X2.

1.3 IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOJRCE AND NORMAL SOURCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFBS AND (:T-.5 It AVAILABLE.

1.3.1 On ALL Oconee Units, place the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 3

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 185: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 185 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

NOTE: The "S" breakers will be opened in manual for all Oconee Units prior to energizing the STBY Busses from CT-5. This will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at once on CT-5. The Oconee Units will be loaded on CT-5 one Unit at a time per this procedure.

1.3.2 Open or verify open the following breakers:

UNIT 1

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 , STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 3 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

1.3.3 From Unit 2, energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing:

* SLI CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

CAUTION: Restoration of power to ALL three units must be coordinated with Unit 1 taking the lead.

1.3.4 Energize Unit 2's MFBs from CT-5 by performing:

a. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 2A HPI PUMP

* 2B HPI PUMP

* 2A MD EFDW PUMP

* 2B MD EFDW PUMP

Page 186: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 186 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

CAUTION: Coordination between the units for closing the Standby Bus breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

b. Energize Unit 2's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

c. Place the following Unit 2 Transfer switches to AUTO:

/__* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/__* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

d. IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Fo wing Load Shed for Unit 2) to restore essential loads for Unit 2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

1.3.5 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2's MFBs, dispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standb per AP/0/A/1 700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

1.3.6 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power per AP/2/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power).

1.3.7 I F Unit 2's MFBs do NOT have power refer to AP/2/A/1 700/26 (Loss of DHR) to use the Steam Generators for heat transfer.

Page 187: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 187 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

2.0 Steps 2.1 and 2.2 outlines the contingency plans for the following section:

12.6 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP onto the Lee Combustion Turbine.

2.1 IF CT-5 FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNITS MFB.

NOTE: 1. Should CT-5 fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the Keowee Underground in approximatel one second.

2. Should the Keowee Underground then fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the startup transformers.

3. Consult Emergency Plan if power to the MFBs is lost for greater than or equal to 15 minutes.

2.1.1 Verify the Oconee Units are receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify open the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

b. Verify closed the following breakers:

* SK1 CT4 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SK2 CT4 STBY BUS 2 FDR

2.1.2 Perform Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2)

2.1.3 IF the Keowee Underground unit is energizing the STBY Busses, then transfer back to the startup source per the test procedure.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

2.2 IF BOTH CT-5 FAIL AND T)E KEOWEE UNDERGROUND FAIL TO CONNECT AND ENERGIZE THE MFBIS.

2.2.1 Verify Unit 2 is being powered from the Startup Transformers:

SS12 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFBi) OPEN

* S22 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2) OPEN

* El 2 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

Page 188: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 188 of 202

* ._ E22 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

Page 189: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 189 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

2.2.2 IF a retransfer to startup occurs, perform Enclosure 13.10 (-ctions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2)

STOP this Enclosure.

2.3 IF the startup source fails to energize the affected Unit(s) MFBs and the normal source is available, then energize the MFBs from the normal source by performing the following on the affected Unit(s):

2.3.1 Place the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

2.3.2 Open or Verify Open the following breakers:

S* Sl (STBYBUS1 TOMFBl)

* S21 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* Ell (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

E21 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

2.3.3 Close the N breakers by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator t the 2MFB1 and 2MFB2 sync check relays. (Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 2MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 2, on B1T-2.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB1 by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) wit a

n and hold while the operator at "N12 MFBl ORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 2, metal plate and close the cover.

.0 c. Perform the following to energize 2MFB2:

Page 190: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 190 of 202

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 2, on B2T-12.

0

Page 191: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 191 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB2 2 , by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N22 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

.d. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 2, metal plate and close the cover.

2.3.4 When power is resored to the MFBs, perform Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2)

NOTE: Unit 2 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems should be operating within 1 hour after the transformer is backcharged.

2.3.5 Verify Unit 2 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 2X1 or 2X2.

,..-_2.3.6 Verify Unit 2 Auxiliary Transformer (2T) oil pumps and fans are power from 2X1 or 2X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

3.0 Steps 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following V section:

12.2 Block Loading of Three Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Overhead Powerpath after a Keowee Load Rejection from the Grid and a Switchyard Isolation.

3,fI KEQWEE OVERHEAD FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE _UNIT .MFB'S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Overhead fail to energize the Oconee MFB's the Oconee Units will transfer to the Keowee Underground unit in %31 seconds. Consult Emergency Plan if power to the MFBs is lost for greater than or equal to 15 minutes.

3.1.1 Verify that Unit 2 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify open the following breakers:

* El 2 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

* E22 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

b. Verify closed the following breakers:

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB 1

Page 192: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 192 of 202

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB 2

Page 193: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 193 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3.1.2 IF Unit 2 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground, begin Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2)

CONTINUE with this Enclosure.

NOTE: 1. This procedure places priority on restoring the System Grid to the Startup Transformers even IF neither Keowee Unit is successful at energizing the affected Unit(s) MFBs.

2. The OSM may decide to transfer to the normal source OR CT-5 rior to OR in parallel with restoring the System Grid to the tartup Transformers.

3.1.3 IF the Keowee Unit fails to energize the Startup Transformers, then energize the Startup Transformers from the System Grid by performing the following:

a. Reset the External Grid Trouble Protection System by depressing the reset pushbuttons for both channels from Unit 2 Control Room:

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 2 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 2 RESET

b. Verify the following statalarms NOT ILLUMINATED:

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-2)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-4)

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-1)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-3)

3.1.4 IF Unit 2 is NOT receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit, perform the following to energize the Startup Transformers from the System Grid:

a. Open QR verify open PCB-27

-b. Close PCB-26

Page 194: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 194 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3.1.5 IF Unit 2's MFBs are re-energized from the Startup Transformers after completion of step 3.1.4 begin Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2)

CONTINUE with this Enclosure.

3.1.6 IF ANY Unit is receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit, then synchronize the Keowee Overhead Unit to the System Grid per 12.2.22 as described in the test procedure.

3.1.7 Notify Keowee Operations to open OR verify open Overhead ACB for the Keowee Overhead Unit.

3.1.8 Close OR verify closed the following PCB's:

* PCB-1 2 -- * PCB-1 5 _ * PCB-1 7

* PCB-1 8 . * PCB-26 _ PCB-27

* PCB-28 * PCB-30 * PCB-33

* PCB-8 _* PCB-9 ___ PCB-21

* PCB-24

3.1.9 IF Unit 2 is receiving power from the Lee CT or Keowee Underground, then when the System Grid had been reestablished to the Startup Transformers, transfer Unit 2 from the Keowee Underground OR CT-5 to the Startup Transformers.

3.1.10 Place the following Unit 2 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

_/ _* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

_/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: 1. Step 3.1.11 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 2. Transfer to the Startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

2. The SSF will lose power during this transfer.

Page 195: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 195 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3.1.11 Simultaneously open the following breakers.

/* S1 2 STBY BUS 1 to MFB1

/ * S22 STBY BUS 2 to MFB2

3.1.12 After 3 seconds, close the following breakers:

/ * El2 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ - E22 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

3.1.13 Place the following Unit 2 transfer switches to AUTO:

____e/ STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

3.1.14 IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2).

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

..2 IF KEOWEE QVERHEAD UNIT AND KEWEE INDERGROUND IJNIT FAIL TO ENERGIZE ANY IJNITe MFBS.o

3.2.1 Energize the MFBs form the Normal Source by placing the following Unit 2 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/___*STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

-- / * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

/ _* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

/ / *MFB2 AUTO/MAN

3.2.2 Open OR verify open the following Unit 2 breakers:

* S1 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S2 2 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* El2 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E22 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

Page 196: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 196 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3.2.3 Energize the MFBs from the Auxiliary Transformer by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 2MFB1 and 2MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Units 1 and 2 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 1 MFB1:

-- 1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 2, on B1T-2.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB1 2, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N1 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 2, metal plate and close the cover.

c. Perform the following to energize 2MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 2, on B2T-12. 2. Energize the output of sync check relay,

25XB22, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N22 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 2 , metal plate and close the cover.

-3.2.4 When power is restored to the MFBs, begin Enclosure 13.10 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 2)

NOTE: After the MFB(s) are energized, ensure the Unit 2 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems are operating within 1 hour after the transformer is back charged.

3.2.5 Verify that the Unit 2 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 2X1 or 2X2.

3.2.6 Verify Unit 2 Auxiliary Transformer (2T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 1X1 or 2X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

Page 197: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 197 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for closing the Lee breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

. IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOURCE. KEQWEE UNDERGR UND. AND NORMAL SOJRCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFB'.

3.3.1 Energize the Unit 2's MFBs from CT-5 by placing the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 3

*STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: Opening the "S" breakersfor ALL Units will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at once on CT-5.

3.3.2 Open or verify open the following breakers on all Oconee Units:

UNIT 1

* S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S1 2 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 2 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 3

S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

Page 198: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 198 of 202

__* S2 3 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

Page 199: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 7, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 199 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

3.3.3 Energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for loading the Standby Bus must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

3.3.4 Energize the Oconee Units MFBs from CT-5 by performing the following:

UNIT 1

a. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 1A HPI PUMP

* 1B HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFW PUMP

* 1 MD EFW PUMP

b. Energize Unit 1's MFBs by closing the following break ers:

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

- S2, STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

c. Perform Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1) to restore essential loads for Unit 1.

UNIT 2

d. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 2A HPI PUMP

* 2B HPI PUMP

* 2A MD EFW PUMP

* 2B MD EFW PUMP

Page 200: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 200 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12B

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 2

e. Energize Unit 2's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

f. Perform Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 2) to restore essential loads for Unit 2.

UNIT 3

g. Place the switches for the following pumps in the OFF positions:

* 3A HPI PUMP

* 3B HPI PUMP

* 3A MD EFW PUMP

* 3B MD EFW PUMP

h. Energize Unit'3 MFB's by closing the following breakers:

* S13 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

i. IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3) to restore essential loads for Unit 3.

3.3.5 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2's MFBs, dispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standby per AP/0/A/1700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

3.3.6 IF power has NO. been restored to Unit 2's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power by referring to AP/2/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power) for the applicable Oconee Unit.

3.3.7 I F Unit 2's MFBs do NOT have power refer to AP/2/A/1700/26 (Loss of DH R) to prepare to use the Steam Generators for heat transfer.

Page 201: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 201 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

1.0 Steps 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following sections:

12.1 Block Loading of Three Unit Loss of Offsite Power(LOOP) Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.3 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Accelerating Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath.

12.4 Block Loading of One Unit LOCA Loads and One Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid.

12.5 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Underground Powerpath after the Keowee Unit Load Rejection from the Grid.

1.1 IF KEOWEE UNDERGROUND FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNIT MFB'S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Underground fail, the Oconee Units should return to the Startup Transformer. This transfer should occur automatically once the Startup Transformers are re-energized per the test procedure. The 'retransfer to startup" logic will reenergize the MFB's once the EPSL senses NO voltage on both STBY Busses AND Voltage on the Startup Transformer. Consult Emergency Plan LF power to the MFBs is lost for ;t 15 minutes.

1.1.1 Verify MFBs are receiving power from the Startup Transformer:

SS13 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1) OPEN

SS23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2) OPEN

* El3 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

SE23 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

1.1.2 IF a retransfer to startup occurs, perform the Following enclosures:

_ a. IF ES was actuated on Unit 3, then perform Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3)

b. Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3).

STOP this enclosure.

Page 202: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 202 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

1.2 IF STARTUP SOURCE FAILS TO ENERGIZE THE AFFECTED .NIT MFBS AND THE NORMAL SOURCE IS AVAILABLE.

1.2.1 Place the following Unit 3 AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

STANDBY BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

1.2.2 Open OR verify open the following breakers:

SS13 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

SEl 3 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E23 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

1.2.3 CLOSE the "N" breakers by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 3MFB1 and 3MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Unit 3 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 3MFBI1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 3, on BIT-3.

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB13, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "NI3 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 3, metal plate and close the cover.

d. Perform the following to energize 32MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 32, on 3B2T-2.

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB23, by pushing the metal plate (bottom

Page 203: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 203 of 202

center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N2A MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

Page 204: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 204 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 3, metal plate and close the cover.

1.2.4 When power is restored to the MFBs, perform the following enclosures IN SEQUENCE:

a. Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3)

_ b. Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

NOTE: Unit 3 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems should be operating within 1 hour after the transformer is backcharged.

1.2.5 Verify Unit 3 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 3X1 or 3X2,.

1.2.6 Verify Unit 3 Auxiliary Transformer (3T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 3X1 or 3X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

.3 IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOURCE AND NORMAL SOURCE FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFBS AND CT-5 IS AVAILABLE.

1.3.1 On ALL Oconee Units, place the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 3

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: The "S" breakers will be opened in manual for ALL Oconee Units prior to energizing the S1BY Busses from CT-5. This will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at

Page 205: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 205 of 202

once on CT-5. The Oconee Units will be loaded on CT-5 one Unit at a time per this procedure.

Page 206: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 206 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

1.3.2 Open or verify open the following breakers:

UNIT 1

* S11 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

SS2, STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 3

* S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

1.3.3 From Unit 2, energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

CAUTION: Restoration of power to ALL three Units must be coordinated with Unit 1 taking the lead.

1.3.4 Energize the Unit 3's MFBs from CT-5 by performing:

a. Reset ES digital channels 1 through 8 by depressing the reset buttons on 3UB1:

* CH1

* CH 2

* CH 3

* CH 4

* CH 5

* CH 6

* CH 7

Page 207: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 207 of 202

* CH8

Page 208: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 208 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

b. Verify or place the switches for the following pumps in the OFF positions:

* 3A HPI Pump

* 3B HPI Pump

* 3A MD EFW Pump

* 3B MD EFW Pump

c. Open the breakers for the following pumps by going to TRIP with the control switch:

* 3C LPI Pump

* 3A LPI Pump

* 3B LPI Pump

d. At the ES RZ Module, place the following pumps in the OFF position:

* 3A RBS Pump

3 3 RBS Pump

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for closing the Standby Bus breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

e. Energize Unit 3's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S13 (STBY BUS 1 to MFB1)

* S23 STBY BUS 2 to MFB2)

f. Place the following Unit 3 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

/ * STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

g. IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3) to restore essential loads for Unit 3.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

Page 209: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 209 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

1.3.5 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2's MFBs, Tispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standby per AP/0/A/1 700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

1.3.6 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 3's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power per AP/3/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power) for the applicable Oconee Unit.

1.3.7 I F Unit 3 MFB's do NOT have power consult the TSC for aiternate methods to cool the Unit 3 Spent Fuel Pool.

2.0 Steps 2.1 and 2.2 outlines the contingency plans for the following section:

12.6 Block Loading Single Unit LOCA and Two Unit LOOP onto the Lee Combustion Turbine.

2.1 IF CT-5 FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY OCONEE UNITS

NOTE: 1. Should CT-5 fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the Keowee Underground in approximately one second.

2. Should the Keowee Underground then fail, the Oconee Units should automatically transfer to the startup transformers.

3. Consult Emergency Plan IFpower to the MFBs is lost for a 15 minutes.

2.1.1 Verify the Oconee Units are receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify open the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

b. Verify closed the following breakers:

* SKI CT4 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SK2 CT4 STBY BUS 2 FDR

2.1.2 Perform Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3)

Page 210: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 210 of 202

2.1.3 IF the Underground Keowee unit is energizing the STBY Busses, then transfer back to the startup source per the test procedure.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE.

Page 211: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 211 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

2.2 IF BQTH CT-5 FAIL AND THE KEOWEE UNDERGROUND FAIL TO CONNECT AND ENERGIZE THE OCONEE UNITS.

2.2.1 Verify Unit 3 is being powered from the Startup Transformer:

* S13 (STBYBUS 1 TOMFB1) OPEN

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2) OPEN

* El 3 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

* E23 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR) CLOSED

2.2.2 IF a retransfer to startup occurs, perform the following Enclosures:

_ a. Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3)

.. b. Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

STOP this Enclosure.

2.3 IF the startup source fails to energize Unit 3 MFBs and the normal source is available, then energize the MFBs from the normal source by performing the following on the affected Unit(s):

2.3.1 Place the following Unit 3 AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

* MFB2 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

2.3.2 Open or Verify Open the following breakers:

* S13 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* El 3 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E23 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

Page 212: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 212 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

2.3.3 CLOSE the "N" breakers by performing the following:

-- a. Send an Operator to the 1MFB1 and 1MFB2 sync check relays. (Location: Units 3 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 3MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 1, on B1T-3.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB1 1, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N1 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes te breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 3, metal plate and close the cover.

--. c. Perform the following to energize 3MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 32, on B2T-2.

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB2 3, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N23 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3 Release sync check relay, 25XB2 3, metal plate and close the cover.

2.3.4 When power is resored to the MFBs, perform the following enclosures IN SEQUENCE:

a. Enclosure 13.8 (Actions Following Load Shed and ES Actuation for Unit 3)

b. Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

2.3.5 Verify Unit 3 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 3X1 or 3X2.

2.3.6 Verify Unit 3 Auxiliary Transformer (3T) oil pumps and fans are power from 3X1 or 3X2.

STOP This Enclosure

Page 213: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 213 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3 3.0 Steps 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 outlines the contingency plans for the following

section:

12.2 Block Loading of Three Unit LOOP Loads onto the Keowee Hydro via the Overhead Powerpath after a Keowee Load Rejection from the Grid and a Switchyard Isolation.

3.1 IF KEQWEE OVERHEAD FAILS TO PROVIDE POWER TO ANY O)CO)NEE UNIT MFFI'S.

NOTE: Should the Keowee Overhead fail to energize the Oconee MFB's the Oconee Units will transfer to the Keowee Underground unit in m31 seconds. Consult Emergency Plan IF power to the MFBs is lost for 2 15 minutes.

3.1.1 Verify that Unit 3 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground Unit:

a. Verify open the following breakers:

* E13 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

* E23 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

b. Verify closed the following breakers:

* S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB 1

* S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB 2

3.1.2 IF Unit 3 is receiving power from the Keowee Underground, begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

CONTINUE with this enclosure.

NOTE: 1. This procedure places priority on restoring the System Grid to the Startup Transformers even IF neither Keowee Unit is successful at energizing the affected Unit(s) MFBs.

2. The OSM may decide to transfer to the normal source OR CT5 prior to OR in parallel with restoring the System Grid to the Startup Transformers.

Page 214: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 214 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

3.1.3 IF the Keowee Unit fails to energize the Startup Transformers, then energize the Startup Transformers from the System Grid by performing the following:

a. Reset the External Grid Trouble Protection System by depressing the reset pushbuttons for both channels from Unit 2 Control Room:

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.V. CHANNEL 2 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 1 RESET

* GRID TROUBLE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM U.F. CHANNEL 2 RESET

b. Verify the following statalarms NQT ILLUMINATED:

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-2)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERFREQUENCY (SA-1 5, A-4)

* CHANNEL # 1 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-1)

* CHANNEL # 2 UNDERVOLTAGE (SA-1 5, C-3)

3.1.4 IF Unit 3 is NOT receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit perform the following to energize the Startup Transformer from the System Grid:

-- a. Open OR verify open PCB-30

b. Close PCB-28

3.1.5 IF Unit 3's MFBs are re-energized from the Startup Transformer after completion of step 3.1.4, begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

CONTINUE with this Enclosure

3.1.6 IF ANY Unit is receiving power from the Keowee Overhead Unit, then synchronize the Keowee Overhead Unit to the System Grid per 12.2.22 as described in the

Page 215: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 215 of 202

* test procedure.

0

Page 216: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 216 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3 3.1.7 Notify Keowee Operations to open OR verify open

Overhead ACB for the Keowee Overhead Unit.

3.1.8 Close OR verify closed the following PCB's:

* PCB-1 2 * PCB-1 5 * PCB-1 7

* PCB-18 * PCB-26 * PCB-27

* PCB-28 * PCB-30 * PCB-33

* PCB-8 -- * PCB-9 _* PCB-21

* PCB-24

3.1.9 IF Unit 3 is receiving power form the Lee CT or Keowee Underground, then when the System Grid had been re-established to the Startup Transformers, transfer Unit 3 receiving power from the Keowee Underground OR CT-5 to the Startup Transformers.

3.1.10 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches to MANUAL

/___* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/_ * STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

_/ * MFB1 AUTO/MAN

_/ * MFB2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: Step 3.1.11 will cause a loss of power to both MFB's on Unit 3. Transfer to the startup source should be made in less than 20 seconds to avoid a load shed initiated by the MFB Monitor Panel.

3.1.11 Simultaneously open the following breakers:

_ * S13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

/_ * S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

3.1.12 After 3 seconds close the following breakers:

_ * El 3 MFB1 STARTUP FDR

/ * E2 3 MFB2 STARTUP FDR

3.1.13 Place the following Unit 3 transfer switches in AUTO:

Page 217: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 217 of 202

------ STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

/. *. STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

3.1.14 IF power is restored, perform Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

3.2 IF KEOWEE QVERHEAD UNIT AND KEQWEE INDERGRQUND UNIT FAIL TO ENERGIZE ANY UNIT'S MFB'S.

3.2.1 Energize MFBs from the Normal Source by placing the following Unit 3 Transfer switches to MANUAL:

* MFB1 AUTO/MAN

.MFB32 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

3.2.2 Open OR verify open the following breakers:

* S1 3 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

* El 3 (MFB1 STARTUP FDR)

* E23 (MFB2 STARTUP FDR)

3.2.3 Energize the MFBs from the Auxiliary Transformer by performing the following:

a. Send an Operator to the 3MFB1 and 3MFB2 sync check relays.(Location: Unit 3 Blockhouse)

b. Perform the following to energize 3MFB1:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB1 3, on B1T-3.

2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB13 , by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N1 MFB1 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB1 3, metal plate and close the cover.

Page 218: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 218 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3 c. Perform the following to energize 32MFB2:

1. Remove the cover from the sync check relay, 25XB2 32, on 3B2T-2.

-- 2. Energize the output of sync check relay, 25XB23, by pushing the metal plate (bottom center) with a pen and hold while the operator at "N23 MFB2 NORMAL FDR" control switch closes the breaker.

3. Release sync check relay, 25XB2 3, metal plate and close the cover.

3.3 When power is restored to the MFBs, begin Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3)

NOTE: After the MFB(s) are energized, ensure the Unit 3 Main and Auxiliary Transformer support systems are operating within I hour after the transformer is back charged.

-- 3.3.1 Verify Unit 3 Main Transformer oil pumps and fans are powered from 3X1 or 3X2.

3.3.2. Verify Unit 3 Auxiliary Transformer (3T) oil pumps and fans are powered from 3X1 or 3X2.

STOP THIS ENCLOSURE

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for closing the Lee breakers must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

3.4 IF BOTH THE STARTUP SOURCE. KEOWEE UNDERGROUND. AND NORMAL SOUR(E FAIL TO ENERGIZE THE MFB'S.

3.4.1 Energize the Unit 3's MFBs from CT-5 by placing the following AUTO/MAN transfer switches to MANUAL:

UNIT 1

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

UNIT 2

* STANDBY 1 AUTO/MAN

* STANDBY 2 AUTO/MAN

Page 219: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 219 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3 UNIT 3

* STBY BUS 1 AUTO/MAN

* STBY BUS 2 AUTO/MAN

NOTE: Opening the "S" breakers for ALL Units will prevent simultaneous block loading of all three Oconee Units at once on CT-5.

3.4.2 Open or verify open the following breakers on all Oconee Units:

UNIT 1

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S2 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 2

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

UNIT 3

SS13 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S23 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

3.4.3 Energize the STBY Busses from CT-5 by closing the following breakers:

* SL1 CT5 STBY BUS 1 FDR

* SL2 CT5 STBY BUS 2 FDR

Page 220: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 220 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

CAUTION: Coordination between the Units for loading the Standby Bus must take place with Unit 1 taking the lead.

3.4.4 Energize the Oconee Units MFBs from CT-5 by ierforming the following for each affected Oconee unit:

UNIT 1

a. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 1A HPI PUMP

* 1B HPI PUMP

* 1A MD EFW PUMP

* 1B MD EFW PUMP

b. Energize Unit 1's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S1 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S21 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

c. Perform Enclosure 13.6 (Actions Following Load Shed for Unit 1) to restore essential loads for Unit 1.

UNIT 2

d. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 2A HPI PUMP

* 2B HPI PUMP

* 2A MD EFW PUMP

* 2B MD EFW PUMP

e. Energize Unit 2's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S12 STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1

* S22 STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2

Page 221: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 221 of 202

f. Perform Enclosure 13.7 (Actions Followin Load Shed for Unit 2) to restore essential loads forUnit 2.

Page 222: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 222 of 202

ENCLOSURE 13.12C

CONTINGENCY ACTIONS FOR POWER RESTORATION FOR UNIT 3

UNIT 3

g. Verify or place the following switches in the OFF positions:

* 3A HPI PUMP

* 3B HPI PUMP

* 3A MD EFW PUMP

* 3B MD EFW PUMP

g. Energize Unit 3's MFBs by closing the following breakers:

* S13 (STBY BUS 1 TO MFB1)

* S23 (STBY BUS 2 TO MFB2)

h. IF pwer is restored, perform Enclosure 13.11 (Actions Following Dead Bus Transfer for Unit 3) to restore essential loads for Unit 3.

3.4.5 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 2's MFBs, dispatch operators to the SSF to start the Diesel Generators and run in Standby per AP/0/A/1700/25 (SSF EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE).

3.4.6 IF power has NOT been restored to Unit 3's MFBs then continue efforts to restore power by referring to AP/3/A/1700/11 (Loss of Power) for the applicable Oconee Unit.

3.4.7 I F Unit 3 MFB's do NOT have power consult the TSC for alternate methods to cool the Unit 3 Spent Fuel Pool.

0

Page 223: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 223 of 202

13.13

Unit 3 Post ES Actuation Alignment NOTE: OP/3/A/1 104/15 states to position the RBCU outlet valves to

maintain 5 11 50F at the RBCU Inlet. For the purpose of this test 3LPSW-18,21 and 24 will be throttled to allow LPSW flow of sl 500 gpm.

1.0 Refer to OP/3/A/1 104/15 (Reactor Building Cooling System) and align the RBCUs as follows:

1.1 Start or verify operating 2 RBCU's in HIGH speed.

* 3A RBCU

* 3B RBCU

* 3C RBCU

1.2Close 3LPSW-566 (3B RBCU Isolation)

1.30pen 3LPSW-565 (RB AUX FAN Coolers Inlet)

1.4 Position the following valves to pass %1 500 gpm LPSW flow:

* 3LPSW-18 (3A RBCU OUTLET)

* 3LPSW-21 (3B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 3LPSW-24 (3C RBCU OUTLET).

2.0 Position the following ES valves in the CLOSED position:

* 3HP-24 (3A HPI BWST SUCTION)

* 3HP-25 (3B HPI BWST SUCTION)

* 3HP-26 (3A HP INJECTION)

* 3HP-27 (3B HP INJECTION)

* 3LP-1 7 (3A LP INJECTION)

* 3LP-18 (3B LP INJECTION)

* 3BS-1 (3A RB SPRAY INLET)

* 3BS-2 (38 RB SPRAY INLET)

Page 224: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 224 of 202

13.13

Unit 3 Post ES Actuation Alignment

3.0 Position the following ES valves to the OPEN position:

* 3HP-3 (HPI LETDOWN ISOL)

* 3HP-4 (HPI LETDOWN ISOL)

* 3HP-20 (HPI SEAL RETURN ISOL)

* 3CS-5 (QT DRAIN LINE ISOL)

* 3GWD-1 2 (QT VENT LINE ISOL)

* 3LWD-1 (RB NORMAL SUMP ISO)

* 3LPSW-6 (RCP MTR CLR SUPPLY)

* 3LPSW-1 5 (RCP MTR CLR OUTLET)

* 3CC-7 (CC RETURN ISOLATION)

* 3PR-7 (RB RADIATION MONITOR INLET)

* 3PR-9 (RB RADIATION MONITOR RETURN)

* 3RC-5 (PRESS SAMPLE ISOLATION)

* 3RC-6 (PRESS SAMPLE ISOLATION)

* 3FDW-105 (3A SG SAMPLE)

* 3FDW-107 (3B SG SAMPLE)

* 3FDW-103 (SG SHELL DRAIN BLOCK)

* 3FDW-104 (SG SHELL DRAIN BLOCK)

NOTE: Step 4.0 is N/A if ALL testing per Section 12.0 is complete.

4.0 IF Unit 3 BWST level is < 35ft, have Operations refill the BWST to > 35ft prior to initiating ES actuation per tests 12.4, 12.5 and 12.6.

Page 225: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 225 of 202

Enclosure 13.14

Unit 1 Post Test Alignment

1.0 Align the HPI System as follows:

1.1 OPEN the following valves:

/ _* 1HP-106 (HPI Pump 1A Discharge)

S * 1 HP-i 10 (HPI Pump 1 B Discharge)

1.2 IF desired by the Unit 1 Shift Supervisor, rack out the breakers for the 1 A and 1 B HPI pumps:

* 1A HPI Pump (1 TC-8)

* 1B HPI Pump (1TE-9)

1.3 IF desired by the Unit 1 Shift Supervisor align the makeup flowpath to LPI from the BHUT (Bleed Hold-Up Tank) per OP/1/A/1 104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

1.4 Align the Emergency Feedwater System as follows:

1.4.1 Perform the following: (TB/B E-24) 0Lock closed 1FDW-352 (1A MDEFDW Pump Test Block). / *. Lock closed 1 FDW-354 (18 MDEFDW Pump Test Block).

SClose 1FDW-353 (1 A MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

/ * Close 1 FDW-355 (1 B MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

1.4.2 OPEN the following valves:

/- * 1FDW-372 (1A MD EFDWP Discharge to SG 1A)

S *1FDW-382 (1 B MD EFDWP Discharge to SG 1 B)

1.4.3 IF desired by the Unit 1 Shift Supervisor, rack out the breakers for both MD EFDW Pumps:

- * A MD EFDW Pump

* 1 B MD EFDW Pump

2.0 Start the normal power alignment per OP/1 /A/1 107/02 (Normal Power) to align the electrical power system.

Page 226: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 226 of 202

Enclosure 13.14

Unit 1 Post Test Alignment

3.0 Return the Unit 1 &2 LPSW system to normal as follows:

3.1 Throttle the following valves to establish the desired LPSW flow through each UNIT 1 RBCU outlet:

* 1LPSW-18 (1A RBCU OUTLET)

* 1 LPSW-21 (1 B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 1 LPSW-24 (1 C RBCU OUTLET)

3.2 Throttle the following valves to establish the desired LPSW flow through each UNIT 2 RBCU outlet:

* 2LPSW-1 8 (2A RBCU OUTLET)

* 2LPSW-21 (2B RBCU & RB AUX FAN CLRS OUTLET)

* 2LPSW-24 (2C RBCU OUTLET)

3.3 Stop LPSW flow through the Unit 1 and Unit 2 MTOT Coolers.

* Close 1 LPSW-51 (MTOT COOLER TEMP CONTROLLER)

* Close 2LPSW-51 (MTOT COOLER TEMP CONTROLLER)

* When the total Unit 1 and Unit 2 RBCU and LPI Cooler LPSW flow < 12,000 gpm, go to one LPSW pump operating.

3.0 Verify one CC pump operating and the standby CC pump in AUTO. 4.0 Place the CCW Amertap System in service per OP/1 /A/1 104/12

(Condenser Circulating Water System)

Page 227: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 227 of 202

Enclosure 13.15

Unit 2 Post Test Alignment

1.0 Align the HPI System as follows:

1.1 Open the following valves:

/ * 2HP-106 (HPI Pump 2A Discharge)

* 2 HP-i 10 (HPI Pump 2B Discharge)

1.2 IF desired by the Unit 2 Shift Supervisor, rack out the breakers for the 2A and 21B HPI pumps:

* 2A HPI Pump (2TC-8)

* 2B HPI Pump (2TE-9)

1.3 IF desired by the Unit 2 Shift Supervisor align the makeup flowpath to LPI from the BHUT (Bleed Hold-Up Tank) per OP/2/A/1104/04 (Low Pressure Injection System).

2.0 Align the Emergency Feedwater System as follows:

2.1 Perform the following: (TB/B E-31)

* Lock closed 2FDW-352 (2A MDEFDW Pump Test Block).

* Lock closed 2FDW-354 (2B MDEFDW Pump Test Block).

/ * Close 2FDW-353 (2A MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

/ * Close 2FDW-355 (2B MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

2.2 Open the following valves:

/ * 2FDW-372 (1A MD EFDWP Discharge to SG A)

* 2FDW-382 (1 B MD EFDWP Discharge to SG 1 B)

2.3 If desired by the Unit 2 Shift Supervisor, rack out the breakers for both MD EFDW Pumps:

* 2A MD EFDW Pump

* 2B MD EFDW Pump

3.0 Start the normal power alignment per OP/2/A/1 107/02 (Normal Power) to align the electrical power system.

O4.0 Verify one CC pump operating and the standby CC pump in AUTO.

5.0 Place the CCW Amertap System in service per OP/1 /A/1 104/12

Page 228: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 228 of 202

(Condenser Circulating Water System)

Page 229: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 229 of 202

Enclosure 13.16

Unit 3 Post Test Alignment

1.0 Realign LPI to the normal decay heat removal mode:

/ 1.0.1 Close 3LP-21 (3A LPI BWST SUCTION)

/ 1.0.2 Close 3LP-22 (3B LPI BWST SUCTION)

1.10 pen and Red Tag 3LP-21 (3A LPI BWST SUCTION) Breaker (3XS1F 51D).

1.20pen and Red Tag 3LP-22 (3B LPI BWST SUCTION) breaker (3XS2-F3D).

1.31Red Tag 3LP-21 (3A LPI BWST SUCTION) Handwheel closed.

1.4Red Tag 3LP-22 (3B LPI BWST SUCTION) Handwheel closed.

1.5 Close the following valves:

* 3BS-1 3 (3A RBS Pump Test)

* 3BS-1 8 (3B RBS Pump Test) O / 3BS-21 (RBS Test Line to BWST Block)

* 3LP-42

1.6 Open or verify open the following valves:

* 3LP-3 (LPI Hotleg Suction)

* 3LP-5 (3A LPI Pump Suction)

* 3LP-6 (3C LPI Pump Suction (A Hdr))

* 3LP-7 (3C LPI Pump Suction (B Hdr))

* 3LP-8 (3B LPI Pump Suction)

/. *. 3LP-9 (3C LPIP Dischg. to 3A LPI Hdr)

* 3LP-10 (3C LPIP Dischg. to 3B LPI Hdr)

* 3LP-1 7 (3A LPI Injection)

* 3LP-1 8 (3B LPI Injection)

Page 230: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 230 of 202

Enclosure 13.16

Unit 3 Post Test Alignment

1.7 Install switch covers on the following valves:

* 3LP-5 (3A LPI Pump Suction)

* 3LP-6 (3C LPI Pump Suction (A Hdr))

* 3LP-7 (3C LPI Pump Suction (B Hdr))

* 3LP-8 (3B LPI Pump Suction)

1.8 Start 3_._ LPI Pump

1.9 Balance flow rates in both headers to = 1500 gpm each by adjusting the following valves:

* 3LP-1 2 (3A LPI COOLER OUTLET)

* 3LP-1 4 (3B LPI COOLER OUTLET)

* 3LP-92 (LPI COOLER 3A BYPASS)

* 3LP-93 (LPI COOLER 3B BYPASS)

B 1.10 IF desired by the Unit 3 Operations Coordinator, place LPI in urification utilizing OP/3/A/1 104/02 (High Pressure Injection

System).

2.0 Align Reactor Building Spray by performing the following:

2.1 Close 3BS-1 (3A RBS Hdr RB Isolation)

2.2 Close 3BS-2 (31 RBS Hdr RB Isolation)

2.3 Complete the "Removing R.B. S pray from ES Standby Mode" enclosure of OP/3/A/1 104/05 (Reactor Building Spray System).

2.4 Drain the 3A and 3B Reactor Building Spray header piping in the reactor building to allow removal of the blank flanges.

2.5 After the piping is drained perform the following:

2.5.1 Remove blank flanges installed in both Reactor Building Spray headers:

* 3A Reactor Building Spray header

._* 3B Reactor Building Spray header

Maintenance Coordinator Test Coordinator

Page 231: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/O/A/0610/025 2nd DRAFT Page 231 of 202

Enclosure 13.16

Unit 3 Post Test Alignment

__/ -- 2.5.2 Open 3BS-1 5 (3A RBS Header Drain)

/_-2.5.3 Open 3BS-20 (3B RBS Header Drain)

3.0 Refer to restricted change # of OP/3/A/1 104/06 (Spent Fuel Cooling System) to complete the fill of the fuel transfer canal in preparation for refueling.

4.0 Start the normal ower alignment per OP/3/A/1 107/02 (Normal Power) to align the electrical power system.

5.0 Align the HPI system as follows:

5.1 Close or verify closed 3HP-26 (3A HP Injection).

5.2 Close or verify closed 3HP-27 (3B HP Injection).

5.3 Rack out the breakers for all the HPI Pumps:

3A HPI Pump

* 3B HPI Pump

* 3C HPI Pump

/----- 5.3.1 Open 3HP-128 (RCP Seal Supply Isolation)

-_/ 5.3.2 Close 3HP-78 (LDST Inlet Stop Check) (Top of LDST)

----- / 5.3.3 Open 3HP-363 (Letdown Line to LPI Pump Suction Block)(E Wall of HPI Hatch)

6.0 Align Emergency Feedwater as follows:

6.1 Rack out the breakers for both MD EFDW Pumps:

* 3A MD EFDW Pump

* 3B MD EFDW Pump

6.2 I F the Emergency Feedwater Pump Discharge valve checklist of OP/3/A/1 106/06 (Emergency Feedwater System) has been performed for the current refueling outage then open the following valves:

/ _* 3FDW-372 (3A MD EFDWP Discharge to SG 3A)

* /. * 3FDW-382 (3B MD EFDWP Discharge to SG 3B)

Page 232: 2.3 OP/1,2,3/A/1 107/02 Normal Power · 7.3 Unit 3 must have the RV Head removed (LTOP concerns). 8.0 Prerequisite System Conditions NOTE: Prerequisite steps may be performed in any

December 6, 1996 TT/0/A/0610/025

2nd DRAFT Page 232 of 202

Enclosure 13.16

Unit 3 Post Test Alignment 6.3 Perform the following: (TB/B E-45)

/ *. Lock closed 3FDW-352 (3A MDEFDW Pump Test Block).

/__*9 Lock closed 3FDW-354 (3B MDEFDW Pump Test Block).

/ *. Close 3FDW-353 (3A MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

--/- -* Close 3FDW-355 (3B MDEFDW Pump Throttle).

7.0 Verify one LPSW Pump operating for the Unit 3 LPSW System.

-----8.0 IF desired split the Unit 3 Vent Header from Units 1&2 per OP/3/1104/18 (Gaseous Waste Disposal System).

9.0 Place the Reactor Building Process Radiation Monitors (RIAs 47, 48, 49, and 49A) in service as follows

9.1 Open or Verify Open the following:

* 3PR-7 (RB RADIATION MONITOR INLET)

* 3PR-8 (RB RADIATION MONITOR INLET) 3PR-9 (RB RADIATION MONITOR RETURN) * 3PR-10 (RB RADIATION MONITOR RETURN)

__9.2 Start the RIA sample pump.

9.3Notify RP the RIAs are in service. FINAL PAGE